2007 Honda Ridgeline Online Reference Owner's Manual
Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.
For a printed owner's manual, click on authorized manuals or go to www.helminc.com.
Contents
Owner's Identification Form
Introduction .........................................................................................................................................i
A Few Words About Safe
ty................................................................................................................iii
Your Vehicle at a Glance.....................................................................................................................3
Driver and Passenger Safety ..............................................................................................................5
Proper use and care of your vehicle's seat belts, and Supplemental Restraint System.
Instruments and Controls.................................................................................................................57
Instrument panel indicator and gauge, and how to use dashboard and steering column controls.
Comfort and Convenience Features ..............................................................................................121
How to operate the climate control system, the audio system, and other convenience features.
Before Driving..................................................................................................................................177
What gasoline to use, how to break-in your new vehicle, and how to load luggage and other cargo.
Driving ..............................................................................................................................................193
The proper way to start the engine, shift the transmission, and park, plus towing a trailer.
Maintenance.....................................................................................................................................233
The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your vehicle to the dealer.
Taking Care of the Unexpected......................................................................................................273
This section covers several problems motorists sometimes experience, and how to handle them.
Technical Information.....................................................................................................................299
ID numbers, dimensions, capacities, and technical information.
Warranty and Customer Relations (U.S. and Canada)................................................................311
A summary of the warranties covering your new Acura, and how to contact us.
Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)......................................................................................................315
How to order manuals and other technical literature.
Index...................................................................................................................................................... I
Service Information Summary
A summary of information you need when you pull up to the fuel pump.
Accord Value Package Audio System
This owner’s manual should be considered
a permanent part of the vehicle and should
remain with the vehicle when it is sold.
The information and specifications included
in this publication were in effect at the time
of approval for printing. Honda Motor Co.,
Ltd. reserves the right, however, to
discontinue or change specifications or
design at any time without notice and
without incurring any obligation whatsoever.
This owner’s manual covers all models of
the Ridgeline. You may find descriptions of
equipment and features that are not on your
particular model.
Owner’s Identification
POUR CLIENTS CANADIEN
AVIS IMPORTANT: Si vous avez
besoin d’un Manuel du Conducteur
en français, veuillez demander à
votreconcessionnairede
commander le numéro de pièce
33SJCC10
OWNER
ADDRESS
V. I. N.
DELIVERY DATE
DEALER NAME DEALER NO.
ADDRESS
OWNER’S SIGNATURE
DEALER’S SIGNATURE
STREET
CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/
POSTAL CODE
(Date sold to original retail purchaser)
STREET
CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/
POSTAL CODE
Main Menu
Several warranties protect your new vehicle. Read the warranty booklet
thoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rights
and responsibilities.
As you read this manual, you will
find information that is preceded by
a symbol. This
information is intended to help you
avoid damage to your vehicle, other
property, or the environment.
One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new vehicle is to
read this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls and
convenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner’s manual in your vehicle so
youcanrefertoitatanytime.
Maintaining your vehicle according to the maintenance minder shown in the
instrument panel helps to keep your driving trouble-free while it preserves
your investment. When your vehicle needs maintenance, keep in mind that
your dealer’s staff is specially trained in servicing the many systems unique
to your vehicle. Your dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and will be
pleased to answer any questions and concerns.
Congratulations! Your selection of a 2007 Honda Ridgeline was a wise
investment. It will give you years of driving pleasure.
Introduction
i
Main Menu
California Proposition 65 Warning
This product contains or emits chemicals known to the state of California to cause cancer and birth
defects or other reproductive harm.
Event Date Recorders
This vehicle is equipped with one or more devices commonly referred to as event data recorders. These devices record
front seat belt use, front passenger seat occupancy, airbag deployment data, and the failure of any airbag system
component. This data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by anyone else except as legally required
or with the permission of the vehicle owner.
Service Diagnostic Recorders
This vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record information about powertrain performance. The data
can be used to verify emissions law requirements and/or help technicians diagnose and solve service problems. It may
also be combined with data from other sources for research purposes, but it remains confidential and is never linked to
the vehicle owner.
Introduction
WARNING:
ii
California Perchlorate Contamination Prevention Act
The airbags, seat belt tensioners, and CR type batteries in this vehicle contain perchlorate materials - special handling
may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
Main Menu
−
−
−
−
−
−
Your safety, and the safety of others,
is very important. And operating this
vehicle safely is an important
responsibility.
To help you make informed
decisions about safety, we have
provided operating procedures and
other information on labels and in
this manual. This information alerts
you to potential hazards that could
hurt you or others.
Of course, it is not practical or
possible to warn you about all the
hazards associated with operating or
maintaining your vehicle. You must
use your own good judgement.
You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,
including:
This entire book is filled with important safety information please read it
carefully.
how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.
such as Driver and Passenger Safety.
These signal words mean:
on the vehicle.
preceded by a safety alert symbol and one of
three signal words: , , or .
such as Important Safety Reminders or Important
Safety Precautions.
Instructions
Safety Section
Safety Labels
Safety Messages
Safety Headings
AFewWordsAboutSafety
DANGER WARNING CAUTION
iii
You CAN be HURT if you don’t follow
instructions.
You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
Main Menu
Your vehicle has higher ground clearance than a passenger vehicle designed for use only on pavement. Higher ground
clearance has many advantages for off-highway driving. It allows you to travel over bumps, obstacles, and rough
terrain. It also provides good visibility so you can anticipate problems earlier. Your vehicle also has a shorter
wheelbase, allowing it to respond quicker to the steering wheel than other sport utility vehicles with a longer
wheelbase.
In addition to these characteristics, your vehicle’s pickup bed area allows you to carry more cargo and has the dual-
action tailgate to handle the items easily.
These advantages come at some cost. Because your vehicle is taller and rides higher off the ground, it has a high
center of gravity. This means your vehicle can tip or roll over if you make abrupt turns. Utility vehicles have a
significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly
more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. As a reminder, make sure you and your passengers always wear
seat belts.
Overloading or improperly loading cargo could affect your handling and the vehicle’s stability, and could result in a
crash. Make sure the cargo is properly loaded and all items are secured in the pickup bed area.
For information on how to reduce the risk of rollover, read ‘‘Driving Guidelines’’ on page of this manual and the
section on page . Failure to operate your vehicle correctly might result in loss of
control or an accident.
194
227
Off-Highway Driving Guidelines
Important Handling Information
iv
Main Menu
＊
＊
＊
CONTINUED
: If equipped
Your Vehicle at a Glance
Your Vehicle at a Glance
3
POWER WINDOW
SWITCHES
HOOD RELEASE
HANDLE
PARKING BRAKE
PEDAL
GLOVE BOX
AUDIO SYSTEM
MIRROR CONTROLS
CENTER CONSOLE
ACCESSORY POWER SOCKETS
HEATING/COOLING
CONTROLS
CLIMATE CONTROL
SYSTEM
DRIVER’S FRONT
AIRBAG
GAUGES
INSTRUMENT PANEL INDICATORS
FUEL FILL DOOR
RELEASE HANDLE
Vehicle with navigation system is shown.
(P.9, 23)
(P.9, 23)
PARKING BRAKE
RELEASE HANDLE
POWER DOOR LOCK
MASTER SWITCH
AUXILIARY INPUT
JACK
REAR VIEW MIRROR WITH
COMPASS
(P.59)
(P.70)
(P.109)
(P.111)
(P.83)
(P.105)
(P.109)
(P.113)
(P.116)
(P.115)
(P.128)
(P.122)
(P.161)
(P.133)
(P.168)
PASSENGER’S FRONT
AIRBAG
(P.181)
(P.179)
Main Menu
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
To use the horn, press the pad around the ‘‘H’’ logo.
Only on vehicles equipped with navigation system. Refer to the navigation system manual.
If equipped.
1:
2:
3:
Your Vehicle at a Glance
4
STEERING WHEEL
ADJUSTMENT
VTM-4 LOCK
SEAT HEATERS
CRUISE CONTROLS
Vehicle with navigation system is shown.
INTERIOR LIGHT
CONTROL SWITCH
HORN
REMOTE AUDIO
CONTROLS
(P.76)
(P.161)
(P.78)
(P.104)
(P.118)
(P.165)
(P.79)
RESET BUTTON
PASSENGER AIRBAG
OFF INDICATOR
(P.29)
HAZARD WARNING
BUTTON
(P.79)
SELECT BUTTON
(P.70)
(P.70)
VOICE CONTROL
SWITCHES
MOONROOF SWITCH INSTRUMENT PANEL
BRIGHTNESS
SHIFT LEVER
(P.108)
MULTI-CONTROL LEVER
(WINDSHIELD WIPERS/
WASHERS/TURN SIGNALS/
HEADLIGHT HIGH BEAMS)
(P.75)
BED LIGHT SWITCH
(P.120)
HEADLIGHT CONTROL
DIAL
CRUISE BUTTON
(P.165)
(P.197)
(P.203)
VEHICLE STABILITY
ASSIST (VSA)
SYSTEM OFF SWITCH
(P.211)
2
1
2
3
2
s
t
Main Menu
−
This section gives you important
information about how to protect
yourself and your passengers. It
shows you how to use seat belts. It
explains how your airbags work. And
it tells you how to properly restrain
infants and children in your vehicle.
.........Important Safety Precautions . 6
.......Your Vehicle’s Safety Features . 7
.......................................Seat Belts . 8
...........................................Airbags . 9
.........Protecting Adults and Teens . 11
.....1. Close and Lock the Doors . 11
...........2. Adjust the Front Seats . 11
............3. Adjust the Seat-Backs . 12
...4. Adjust the Head Restraints . 13
5. Fasten and Position the
.............................Seat Belts . 14
6. Maintain a Proper Sitting
................................Position . 15
.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 16
...Additional Safety Precautions . 17
Additional Information About Your
.................................Seat Belts . 18
..Seat Belt System Components . 18
......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 19
Automatic Seat Belt
...............................Tensioners . 19
...............Seat Belt Maintenance . 20
Additional Information About
...........................Your Airbags . 21
......Airbag System Components . 21
How Your Front Airbags
.........................................Work . 23
...How Your Side Airbags Work . 26
How your Side Curtain Airbags
.........................................Work . 28
..How the SRS Indicator Works . 28
How the Side Airbag Off
......................Indicator Works . 29
How the Passenger Airbag Off
......................Indicator Works . 29
.............................Airbag Service . 30
...Additional Safety Precautions . 31
Protecting Children General
................................Guidelines . 32
All Children Must Be
...............................Restrained . 32
All Children Should Sit in a
.................................Back Seat . 33
The Passenger’s Front Airbag
.........Can Pose Serious Risks . 33
If You Must Drive with Several
...................................Children . 35
If a Child Requires Close
..................................Attention . 35
...Additional Safety Precautions . 36
Protecting Infants and Small
...................................Children . 37
.......................Protecting Infants . 37
.........Protecting Small Children . 38
.....................Selecting a Child Seat . 39
....................Installing a Child Seat . 40
...............................With LATCH . 41
.........With a Lap/Shoulder Belt . 44
..............................With a Tether . 46
...........Protecting Larger Children . 49
...............Checking Seat Belt Fit . 49
..................Using a Booster Seat . 50
When Can a Larger Child Sit in
.........................................Front . 51
...Additional Safety Precautions . 52
.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 53
...................................Safety Labels . 54
Driver and Passenger Safety
Driver and Passenger Safety
5
Main Menu
−
You’ll find many safety
recommendations throughout this
section, and throughout this manual.
Therecommendationsonthispage
are the ones we consider to be the
most important.
Children age 12 and under should
ride properly restrained in a back
seat, not the front seat. Infants and
smallchildrenshouldberestrained
in a child seat. Larger children
should use a booster seat and a lap/
shoulder belt until they can use the
belt properly without a booster seat
(see pages ).
Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Even
one drink can reduce your ability to
respond to changing conditions, and
your reaction time gets worse with
every additional drink. So don’t drink
and drive, and don’t let your friends
drink and drive, either.
Having a tire blowout or a
mechanical failure can be extremely
hazardous. To reduce the possibility
of such problems, check your tire
pressures and condition frequently,
and perform all regularly scheduled
maintenance (see page ).
Excessive speed is a major factor in
crash injuries and deaths. Generally,
the higher the speed, the greater the
risk, but serious injuries can also
occur at lower speeds. Never drive
faster than is safe for current
conditions, regardless of the
maximum speed posted.
A seat belt is your best protection in
all types of collisions. Airbags are
designed to supplement seat belts,
not replace them. So even though
your vehicle is equipped with airbags,
make sure you and your passenger
always wear your seat belts, and
wear them properly (see page ).
While airbags can save lives, they
can cause serious or fatal injuries to
occupants who sit too close to them,
or are not properly restrained.
Infants, young children, and short
adults are at the greatest risk. Be
sure to follow all instructions and
warnings in this manual.
14
32 52
235
Always Wear Your Seat Belt
Restrain All Children
Be Aware of Airbag Hazards
Don’t Drink and Drive
Keep Your Vehicle in Safe
Condition
Control Your Speed
Important Safety Precautions
6
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your vehicle is equipped with many
features that work together to
protect you and your passengers
during a crash.
Some features do not require any
action on your part. These include a
strong steel framework that forms a
safety cage around the passenger
compartment, front and rear crush
zones, a collapsible steering column,
and tensioners that tighten the front
seat belts in a crash.
However, you and your passengers
can’t take full advantage of these
features unless you remain sitting in
a proper position and
. In fact, some safety
features can contribute to injuries if
they are not used properly.
The following pages explain how you
cantakeanactiveroleinprotecting
yourself and your passengers.
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
always wear
your seat belts
Driver and Passenger Safety
7
(7)
(9)
(1)
(2)
(6)
(10)
(8)
(5)
(2)
(11)
(4)
(3)(10)
(6) Seat Belts
(7) Front Airbags
(8) Front Seat Belt Tensioners
(9) Door Locks
(10) Side Airbags
(11) Side Curtain Airbags
(1) Safety Cage
(2) Crush Zones
(3) Seats and Seat-Backs
(4) Head Restraints
(5) Collapsible Steering Column
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your vehicle is equipped with seat
belts in all seating positions.
Keep you from being thrown out
of the vehicle.
Help keep you from being thrown
against the inside of the vehicle
and against other occupants.
Seat belts are the single most
effectivesafetydeviceforadultsand
larger children. (Infants and smaller
children must be properly restrained
in child seats.)
Not wearing a seat belt properly
increases the chance of serious
injury or death in a crash, even
though your vehicle has airbags.
The pickup bed is not equipped with
seats or seat belts. Do not let anyone
ride in the pickup bed as they can
easily be thrown out and be killed or
seriously injured.
In addition, most states and all
Canadian provinces require you to
wear seat belts.
When properly worn, seat belts:
Keep you connected to the vehicle
so you can take advantage of the
vehicle’s built-in safety features.
Your seat belt system also includes
an indicator on the instrument panel
and a beeper to remind you and your
passengers to fasten your seat belts.
Help protect you in almost every
type of crash, including frontal,
side and rear impacts, and
rollovers.
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
Seat Belts
Why Wear Seat Belts
8
Not wearing a seat belt properly
increases the chance of serious
injury or death in a crash, even
though your vehicle has airbags.
Be sure you and your
passengers always wear seat
belts and wear them properly.
Allowing passengers to ride in
the pickup bed or on the tailgate
can result in death or serious
injury in a crash.
Make sure all passengers ride
in a seat and wear a seat belt
properly.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your vehicle has a supplemental
restraint system (SRS) with front
airbags to help protect the heads and
chests of the driver and a front seat
passenger during a moderate to
severe frontal collision (see page
for more information on how
your front airbags work).
Your vehicle has side airbags to help
protect the upper torso of the driver
or a front seat passenger during a
moderate to severe side impact (see
page for more information on how
your side airbags work).
Of course, seat belts cannot
completely protect you in every
crash.Butinmostcases,seatbelts
can reduce your risk of serious
injury.
Help keep you in a good position
should the airbags ever deploy. A
good position reduces the risk of
injury from an inflating airbag and
allows you to get the best
advantage from the airbag.
Always wear
your seat belt, and make sure you
wear it properly.
23
26
CONTINUED
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
Airbags
What you should do:
Driver and Passenger Safety
9
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The rest of this section gives more
detailed information about how you
can maximize your safety.
The most important things you need
to know about your airbags are:
They are designed to supplement
the seat belts.
Your vehicle has side curtain airbags
to help protect the heads of the
driver, front passenger, and
passengers in the outer rear seating
positions during a moderate to
severe side impact or rollover (see
page for more information on how
your side curtain airbags work).
Remember, however, that no safety
system can prevent all injuries or
deaths that can occur in a severe
crash, even when seat belts are
properly worn and the airbags deploy.
Always wear
your seat belt properly, and sit
upright and as far back from the
steering wheel as possible while
allowing full control of the vehicle. A
front passenger should move their
seat as far back from the dashboard
as possible.
To do their job, airbags must
inflate with tremendous force. So
while airbags help save lives, they
can cause minor injuries or more
serious or even fatal injuries if
occupants are not properly
restrained or sitting properly.
28
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
Airbags do not replace seat belts.
Airbags offer no protection in rear
impacts, or minor frontal or side
collisions.
What you should do:
Airbags can pose serious hazards.
10
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
Adjust the driver’s seat as far to the
rear as possible while allowing you to
maintain full control of the vehicle.
Have a front passenger adjust their
seat as far to the rear as possible.
See pages for important
guidelines on how to properly
protect infants, small children, and
larger children who ride in your
vehicle.
The following pages provide
instructions on how to properly
protect the driver, adult passengers,
and teenage children who are large
enough and mature enough to drive
or ride in the front.
After everyone has entered the
vehicle, be sure the doors are closed
and locked. Before driving, be sure
the tailgate is also closed.
Locking the doors reduces the
chance of someone being thrown out
of the vehicle during a crash, and it
helps prevent passengers from
accidentally opening a door and
falling out.
Your vehicle has a door and
tailgate open monitor on
the instrument panel to indicate
when a specific door or the tailgate is
not tightly closed.
Your vehicle also has an
In-Bed Trunk open
indicator to show when the In-Bed
Trunk lid is not tightly closed (see
page ).
Locking the doors also helps prevent
an outsider from unexpectedly
opening a door when you come to a
stop.
See page for how to lock the
doors, and page for how the door
and tailgate open monitor works.
32 52
96
83
64
CONTINUED
Protecting Adults and Teens
Introduction Adjust the Front Seats
Close and Lock the Doors1.
2.
Driver and Passenger Safety
11
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you sit too close to the steering
wheel or dashboard, you can be
seriously injured by an inflating front
airbag, or by striking the steering
wheel or dashboard.
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport
Canada recommend that drivers
allow at least 10 inches (25 cm)
between the center of the steering
wheel and the chest.
Adjust the driver’s seat-back to a
comfortable, upright position,
leaving ample space between your
chest and the airbag cover in the
center of the steering wheel.
Passengers with adjustable seat-
backs should also adjust their seat-
back to a comfortable, upright
position.
If you cannot get far enough away
from the steering wheel and still
reach the controls, we recommend
that you investigate whether some
type of adaptive equipment may help.
Once your seat is adjusted correctly,
rock it back and forth to make sure it
is locked into position. See page
for how to adjust the front seats.98
On RT, RTX, and Canadian LX models
Protecting Adults and Teens
Adjust the Seat-Backs3.
12
Sitting too close to a front
airbag can result in serious
injury or death if the front
airbags inflate.
Always sit as far back from the
front airbags as possible.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Adjust the driver’s head restraint so
the back of your head rests against
the center of the restraint.
Reclining a seat-back so that the
shoulder part of the belt no longer
rests against the occupant’s chest
reduces the protective capability of
the belt. It also increases the chance
of sliding under the belt in a crash
and being seriously injured. The
farther a seat-back is reclined, the
greater the risk of injury.
When a passenger is seated in the
rear center seating position, make
sure the center head restraint is
adjusted to its highest position.
Properly adjusted head restraints
will help protect occupants from
whiplash and other crash injuries.
See page for how to adjust the
head restraints.
See pages and for how to
adjust the seat-backs.
Have passengers adjust their head
restraints properly as well. Taller
persons should adjust their restraint
as high as possible.98 102
100
Protecting Adults and Teens
Adjust the Head Restraints4.
Driver and Passenger Safety
13
Reclining the seat-back too far
can result in serious injury or
death in a crash.
Adjust the seat-back to an
upright position, and sit well
back in the seat.
Improperly positioning head
restraints reduces their
effectiveness and you can be
seriously injured in a crash.
Make sure head restraints are
in place and positioned properly
before driving.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Position the lap part of the belt as
low as possible across your hips,
then pull up on the shoulder part of
the belt so the lap part fits snugly.
This lets your strong pelvic bones
take the force of a crash and reduces
the chance of internal injuries.
Insert the latch plate into the buckle,
then tug on the belt to make sure the
belt is securely latched. Check that
the belt is not twisted, because a
twisted belt can cause serious
injuries in a crash.
If necessary, pull up on the belt again
to remove any slack, then check that
the belt rests across the center of
your chest and over your shoulder.
This spreads the forces of a crash
over the strongest bones in your
upper body.
If the seat belt touches or crosses
your neck, or if it crosses your arm
instead of your shoulder, you need to
adjust the seat belt anchor height.
Fasten and Position the Seat
Belts
5.
Protecting Adults and Teens
14
Improperly positioning the seat
belts can cause serious injury
or death in a crash.
Make sure all seat belts are
properly positioned before
driving.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
This could cause
very serious injuries in a crash.
See page for additional
information about your seat belts
and how to take care of them.
The front seats have adjustable seat
belt anchors. To adjust the height of
an anchor, squeeze the two release
buttons, and slide the anchor up or
down as needed (it has four
positions).
If a seat belt does not seem to work
as it should, it may not protect the
occupant in a crash.
After all occupants have adjusted
their seats and put on seat belts, it is
very important that they continue to
sit upright, well back in their seats,
with their feet on the floor, until the
vehicle is parked and the engine is
off.
Sitting improperly can increase the
chance of injury during a crash. For
example, if an occupant slouches,
lies down, turns sideways, sits
forward, leans forward or sideways,
or puts one or both feet up, the
chance of injury during a crash is
greatly increased.
Using a seat
belt that is not working properly can
result in serious injury or death.
Have your dealer check the belt as
soon as possible.
18
Protecting Adults and Teens
Never place the shoulder portion of a
lap/shoulder belt under your arm or
behind your back.
No one should sit in a seat with an
inoperative seat belt.
Maintain a Proper Sitting
Position
6.
Driver and Passenger Safety
15
RELEASE
BUTTONS
Main Menu
Table of Contents
In addition, an occupant who is out of
position in the front seat can be
seriously or fatally injured in a crash
by striking interior parts of the
vehicle or being struck by an
inflating front airbag.
If you are pregnant, the best way to
protect yourself and your unborn
child when driving or riding in a
vehicle is to always wear a seat belt,
and keep the lap part of the belt as
low as possible across the hips.
When driving, remember to sit
upright and adjust the seat as far
back as possible while allowing full
control of the vehicle. When riding
as a front passenger, adjust the seat
as far back as possible.
This will reduce the risk of injuries
to both you and your unborn child
that can be caused by a crash or an
inflating front airbag.
Each time you have a checkup, ask
your doctor if it’s okay for you to
drive.
Advice for Pregnant Women
Protecting Adults and Teens
16
Sitting improperly or out of
position can result in serious
injury or death in a crash.
Always sit upright, well back in
the seat, with your feet on the
floor.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If they do, they could be very
seriously injured in a crash.
If they do, they could
be killed or very seriously injured
in a crash.
They could be
killed or injured in a crash, or
become ill or even die from carbon
monoxide poisoning if engine
exhaust enters the cap.
A passenger who is not
wearing a seat belt during a crash
or emergency stop can be thrown
against the inside of the vehicle,
against other occupants, or out of
the vehicle.
If they do, they
could be very seriously injured in a
crash.
Devices intended to improve
occupant comfort or reposition the
shoulder part of a seat belt can
reduce the protective capability of
the seat belt and increase the
chance of serious injury in a crash.
Carrying hard or sharp
objects on your lap, or driving with
a pipe or other sharp object in
your mouth, can result in injuries
if your front airbag inflates.
If your
hands or arms are close to an
airbag cover, they could be injured
if the airbag inflates.
Objects on
the covers marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’
could interfere with the proper
operation of the airbags or be
propelled inside the vehicle and
hurt someone if the airbags inflate.
If a side airbag or a
side curtain airbag inflates, a cup
holder or other solid object
attached on or near the door could
be propelled inside the vehicle and
hurt someone.
Protecting Adults and Teens
Additional Safety Precautions
Never let passengers ride in the
area in front of a folded-up rear
seat.
Never let passengers ride in the
pickup bed.
Never let passengers ride inside a
truck cap (shell).
Passengers should not stand up or
change seats while the vehicle is
moving.
Two people should never use the
same seat belt.
Do not put any accessories on seat
belts.
Do not place hard or sharp objects
between yourself and a front
airbag.
Keep your hands and arms away
from the airbag covers.
Do not attach or place objects on
the front airbag covers.
Do not attach solid objects on or
near a door.
Driver and Passenger Safety
17
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your seat belt system includes lap/
shoulder belts in all five seating
positions. The front seat belts are
also equipped with automatic seat
belt tensioners.
This system uses the same sensors
as the front airbags to monitor
whether the front seat belts are
latched or unlatched, and how much
weight is on the front passenger’s
seat (see pages and ).
This system monitors the front seat
belts. If you turn the ignition switch
to the ON (II) position before your
seat belt is fastened, the beeper will
sound and the indicator will flash. If
your seat belt is not fastened before
the beeper stops, the indicator will
stop flashing but remain on.
If a front passenger does not fasten
their seat belt, the indicator will
come on about 6 seconds after the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
(II) position.
When no one is sitting in the front
passenger’s seat, or a child or small
adult is riding there, the indicator
should not come on and the beeper
should not sound.
If the indicator comes on or the
beeper sounds when the driver’s seat
belt is latched and there is no front
seat passenger and no items on the
front seat, something may be
interfering with the monitoring
system. Look for and remove:
Any items under the front
passenger’s seat.
Any objects hanging on the seat or
in the seat-back pocket.
If either the driver or a front
passenger does not fasten their seat
belt while driving, the beeper will
sound and the indicator will flash
again at regular intervals.
The seat belt system
includes an indicator on the
instrument panel and a beeper to
remind you and your passengers to
fasten your seat belts.
Any object on the floor that is
touching the rear of the seat-back.
If no obstructions are found, have
your vehicle checked by a dealer.
2625
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Seat Belt System Components
18
Main Menu
Table of Contents
For added protection, the front seat
belts are equipped with automatic
seat belt tensioners. When activated,
the tensioners immediately tighten
the belts to help hold the driver and
a front passenger in position.
All seat belts have an emergency
locking retractor. In normal driving,
the retractor lets you move freely in
your seat while it keeps some
tension on the belt. During a collision
or sudden stop, the retractor
automatically locks the belt to help
restrain your body.
The seat belts in all positions except
the driver’s have an additional
lockable retractor that must be
activated to secure a child seat (see
page ).
If the shoulder part of the belt is
pulled all the way out, the lockable
retractor will activate. The belt will
retract, but it will not allow the
passenger to move freely.
To deactivate the lockable retractor,
unlatch the buckle and let the seat
belt fully retract. To refasten the
seat belt, pull it out only as far as
needed.
The lap/shoulder belt goes over
your shoulder, across your chest,
and across your hips.
To fasten the belt, insert the latch
plate into the buckle, then tug on the
belt to make sure the buckle is
latched (see page for how to
properly position the belt).
To unlock the belt, press the red
PRESSbuttononthebuckle.Guide
the belt across your body so that it
retracts completely. After exiting the
vehicle, be sure the belt is out of the
way and will not get closed in the
door.
44
14
CONTINUED
Automatic Seat Belt TensionersLap/Shoulder Belt
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Driver and Passenger Safety
19
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If a seat belt is worn during a crash,
it must be replaced by the dealer. A
belt that has been worn during a
crash may not provide the same level
of protection in a subsequent crash.
The dealer should also inspect the
anchors for damage and replace
them if needed. If the automatic seat
belt tensioners activate during a
crash, they must be replaced.
Pull each belt out fully, and look for
frays, cuts, burns, and wear. Check
that the latches work smoothly and
the belts retract easily. If a belt does
not retract easily, cleaning the belt
may correct the problem (see page
). Any belt that is not in good
condition or working properly will
not provide good protection and
should be replaced as soon as
possible.
For safety, you should check the
condition of your seat belts regularly.
The tensioners are designed to
activate in any collision severe
enough to cause the front airbags to
deploy, or if a sensor detects your
vehicle is about to roll over (see page
).
If a side airbag or side curtain airbag
deploys during a side impact, the
tensioner on that side of the vehicle
will also deploy.
The tensioners can also be activated
during a collision in which the front
airbags . In this case, the
airbags would not be needed, but the
additional restraint could be helpful.
When the tensioners are activated,
the seat belts will remain tight until
they are unbuckled.
Honda provides a limited warranty
on seat belts. See your
booklet for
details.
28
261
do not deploy
Honda
Warranty Information
Seat Belt Maintenance
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
20
Not checking or maintaining
seat belts can result in serious
injury or death if the seat belts
do not work properly when
needed.
Check your seat belts regularly
and have any problem
corrected as soon as possible.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your airbag system includes:
Two SRS (supplemental restraint
system) front airbags. The driver’s
airbag is stored in the center of
the steering wheel; the front
passenger’sairbagisstoredinthe
dashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRS
AIRBAG’’ (see page ).
Two side airbags, one for the
driver and one for a front
passenger. The airbags are stored
in the outer edges of the seat-
backs. Both are marked ‘‘SIDE
AIRBAG’’ (see page ).
Two side curtain airbags, one for
each side of the vehicle. The
airbags are stored in the ceiling,
above the side windows. The front
and rear pillars are marked ‘‘SIDE
CURTAIN AIRBAG’’ (see page
).
23
26
26
CONTINUED
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Airbag System Components
Driver and Passenger Safety
21
(15)
(16)
(15)
(8)
(12)
(1)
(3)
(5)
(6)
(4)
(14)
(7)
(14)
(4)
(5)
(10)
(11)
(13)
(2)
(7)
(9)
(6) Driver’s Seat Position Sensor
(7) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors
(8) Front Impact Sensors
(9) Passenger Airbag Off Indicator
(10) Occupant Position Detection System (OPDS) Sensors
(1) Driver’s Front Airbag
(2) Passenger’s Front Airbag
(3) Control Unit
(4) Front Seat Belt Tensioners
(5) Side Airbags
(11) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors/OPDS Sensors Control Unit
(12) SRS Indicator
(13) Side Curtain Airbags
(14) Side Impact Sensors (First)
(15) Side Impact Sensors (Second)
(16) Roll Rate Sensor
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Automatic front seat belt
tensioners (see page ).
Sensors that can detect a
moderate to severe front impact,
side impact, or rollover.
Sensors that can detect whether a
child is in the passenger’s side
airbag path and signal the control
unit to turn the airbag off (see
page ).
Sensors that can detect whether
the driver’s seat belt and a front
passenger’s seat belt is latched or
unlatched (see page ).
A driver’s seat position sensor that
monitors the distance of the seat
from the front airbag. If the seat is
too far forward, the airbag will
inflate with less force (see page
).
Weight sensors that monitor the
weight on the front passenger’s
seat. If the weight is about 65 lbs
(29 kg) or less (the weight of an
infant or small child), the
passenger’s front airbag will be
turned off (see page ).
A rollover sensor that can detect if
your vehicle is about to roll over
and signal the control unit to
deploy both side curtain airbags
and front seat belt tensioners (see
page ).
A sophisticated electronic system
that continually monitors and
records information about the
sensors, the control unit, the
airbag activators, the seat belt
tensioners, and driver and front
passenger seat belt use when the
ignition switch is in the ON (II)
position.
An indicator on the instrument
panel that alerts you to a possible
problem with your airbags,
sensors, or seat belt tensioners
(see page ).
An indicator on the instrument
panel that alerts you that the
passenger’s side airbag has been
turned off (see page ).
An indicator on the dashboard that
alerts you that the passenger’s
front airbag has been turned off
(see page ).
Emergency backup power in case
your vehicle’s electrical system is
disconnected in a crash.
19
27
18
25
25
28
28
29
29
Additional Information About Your Airbags
22
Main Menu
Table of Contents
After inflating, the front airbags
immediately deflate, so they won’t
interfere with the driver’s visibility,
or the ability to steer or operate
other controls.
Although both airbags normally
inflate within a split second of each
other, it is possible for only one
airbag to deploy.
If you ever have a moderate to
severe frontal collision, sensors will
detect the vehicle’s rapid
deceleration.
If the rate of deceleration is high
enough, the control unit will instantly
inflate the driver’s and front
passenger’s airbags, at the time and
with the force needed.
During a frontal crash, your seat belt
restrains your lower body and torso,
and the front airbag helps protect
your head and chest.
This can happen if the severity of a
collision is at the margin, or
threshold, that determines whether
or not the airbags will deploy. In
such cases, the seat belt will provide
sufficient protection, and the
supplemental protection offered by
the airbag would be minimal.
Only the driver’s airbag will deploy if
there is no passenger in the front
seat, or if the advanced airbag
system has turned the passenger’s
airbag off (see page ).25
CONTINUED
How Your Front Airbags Work
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
23
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your front airbags are also dual-
threshold airbags. Airbags with this
feature have two deployment
thresholds that depend on whether
sensors detect the occupant is
wearing a seat belt or not.
Your front airbags are dual-stage
airbags. This means they have two
inflation stages that can be ignited
sequentially or simultaneously,
depending on crash severity.
In a crash, both stages
will ignite simultaneously to provide
the quickest and greatest protection.
In a crash, one stage will
ignite first, then the second stage
will ignite a split second later. This
provides longer airbag inflation time
with a little less force.
The total time for inflation and
deflation is one-tenth of a second, so
fast that most occupants are not
aware that the airbags deployed until
they see them lying in their laps.
After a crash, you may see what
looks like smoke. This is actually
powder from the airbag’s surface.
Although the powder is not harmful,
people with respiratory problems
mayexperiencesometemporary
discomfort. If this occurs, get out of
the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do
so.
If the occupant’s belt is ,
the airbag will deploy at a slightly
lower threshold, because the
occupant would need extra
protection.
If the occupant’s belt is , the
airbag will deploy at a slightly higher
threshold, when the airbag would be
needed to supplement the protection
provided by the seat belt.
Dual-Threshold AirbagsDual-Stage Airbags
more severe
less severe
not latched
latched
Additional Information About Your Airbags
24
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
Your front airbags are also advanced
airbags. The main purpose of this
feature is to help prevent airbag-
caused injuries to short drivers and
children who ride in front.
For both advanced airbags to work
properly:
Occupants must sit upright and
wear their seat belts properly.
Back-seat passengers should not
put their feet under the front seats.
Failure to follow these instructions
could damage the sensors or prevent
them from working properly.
The driver’s advanced front airbag
system includes a seat position
sensor under the seat. If the seat is
too far forward, the airbag will
inflate with less force, regardless of
the severity of the impact.
The passenger’s advanced front
airbag system has weight sensors
under the seat. Although Honda
does not encourage carrying an
infant or small child in front, if the
sensors detect the weight of an
infant or small child (up to about 65
lbs or 29 kg), the system will
automatically turn the passenger’s
front airbag off.
Do not spill any liquids on or
under the seats, cover the sensors,
or put any objects or metal items
under the front seats.
Be aware that objects placed on the
passenger’s seat can also cause the
airbag to be turned off.
If there is a problem with the sensor,
the SRS indicator will come on, and
the airbag will inflate in the normal
manner regardless of the driver’s
seating position.
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Advanced Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
25
DRIVER’S
SEAT
POSITION
SENSOR
PASSENGER’S
SEAT WEIGHT
SENSOR
Main Menu
Table of Contents
When the airbag is turned off, a
‘‘passenger airbag off’’ indicator in
the center of the dashboard comes
on (see page ).
If you ever have a moderate to
severe side impact, sensors will
detect rapid acceleration and signal
the control unit to instantly inflate
either the driver’s or the passenger’s
side airbag and activate the seat belt
tensioner.
If the weight sensors detect there is
no passenger in the front seat, the
airbag will be off. However, the
passenger airbag off indicator will
not come on.
To ensure that the passenger’s
advanced front airbag system will
work properly,
This includes:
Also,makesurethefloormatbehind
the front passenger’s seat is hooked
to the floor mat anchor (see page
). If it is not, the mat may
interfere with the proper operation
of the sensors and operation of the
seat.
Hanging heavy items on the front
passenger seat, or placing heavy
items in the seat-back pocket.
Moving the front seat forcibly
back against cargo on the seat or
floor behind it.
A rear passenger pushing or
pulling on the back of the front
passenger’s seat.
29
261
Additional Information About Your Airbags
How Your Side Airbags Work
do not do anything
that would increase or decrease the
weight on the front passenger’s seat.
26
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Only one airbag will deploy during a
side impact. If the impact is on the
passenger’s side, the passenger’s
side airbag will deploy even if there
is no passenger.
To get the best protection from the
side airbags, front seat occupants
should wear their seat belts and sit
upright and well back in their seats.
Although Honda does not encourage
children to ride in front, if sensors in
the seat detect a child has leaned
into the side airbag’s deployment
path, the airbag will shut off.
Thesideairbagmayalsoshutoffifa
short adult leans sideways, or a
larger adult slouches and leans
sideways into the airbag’s
deployment path.
Objects placed on the front
passenger seat can also cause the
side airbag to be shut off.
Your vehicle has a side airbag cutoff
system designed primarily to protect
a child riding in the front passenger’s
seat.
If the side airbag off indicator comes
on (see page ), have the
passenger sit upright. Once the
passenger is out of the airbag’s
deployment path, the system will
turn the airbag back on, and the
indicator will go out.
There will be some delay between
the moment the passenger moves
into or out of the airbag deployment
pathandwhentheindicatorcomes
on or goes off.
A front seat passenger should not
use a cushion or other object as a
backrest. It may prevent the cutoff
system from working properly.
29
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Side Airbag Cutoff System
Driver and Passenger Safety
27
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If the impact is on the passenger’s
side, the passenger’s side curtain
airbag will inflate even if there are no
occupants on that side of the vehicle.
A rollover sensor monitors the
degree and rate your vehicle may roll
over and automatically deploy the
side curtain airbags and activate the
front seat belt tensioners (see page
).
In a rollover toward the front
passenger’s side of the vehicle, both
side curtain airbags will inflate and
the front seat belt tensioners will
activate even if there are no
occupants on that side of the vehicle.
To get the best protection from the
side curtain airbags, occupants
should wear their seat belts and sit
upright and well back in their seats.
The SRS indicator alerts
you to a potential problem
with your airbags or seat belt
tensioners.
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, this indicator
comes on for several seconds then
goes off. This tells you the system is
working properly.
If the indicator comes on at any
other time, or does not come on at all,
you should have the system checked
by your dealer. For example:
If the SRS indicator does not come
on after you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position.
If the indicator comes on or
flashesonandoffwhileyoudrive.
If the indicator stays on after the
engine starts.
In a moderate to severe side impact,
sensors will detect rapid acceleration
and signal the control unit to
instantly inflate the side curtain
airbag and activate the seat belt
tensioner on the driver’s or the
passenger’s side of the vehicle.
19
Additional Information About Your Airbags
How Your Side Curtain Airbags
Work
How the SRS Indicator Works
In a Side Impact
In a Rollover
28
SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you see any of these indications,
the airbags and seat belt tensioners
may not work properly when you
need them. This indicator
alerts you that the
passenger’s side airbag has been
automatically shut off. It does
mean there is a problem with your
side airbags.
This indicator alerts you that the
passenger’s front airbag has been
shut off because weight sensors
detect about 65 lbs (29 kg) or less
(the weight of an infant or small
child) on the front passenger’s seat.
It does there is a problem
with the airbag.
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, the indicator
should come on for several seconds
andthengooff(seepage ).Ifit
doesn’t come on, stays on, or comes
on while driving without a passenger
in the front seat, have the system
checked.
62
CONTINUED
Additional Information About Your Airbags
How the Side Airbag Off
Indicator Works
How the Passenger Airbag Off
Indicator Works
not
not mean
Driver and Passenger Safety
29
U.S.
Canada
Canada
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR
U.S.
Ignoring the SRS indicator can
result in serious injury or death
if the airbag systems or
tensioners do not work properly.
Have your vehicle checked by a
dealer as soon as possible if
the SRS indicator alerts you to
a possible problem.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your airbag systems are virtually
maintenance free, and there are no
parts you can safely service.
However, you must have your
vehicle serviced if:
Do not try to remove or replace
anyairbagbyyourself.Thismust
be done by an authorized dealer or
a knowledgeable body shop.
Any airbag
that has deployed must be
replaced along with the control
unit and other related parts. Any
seat belt tensioner that activates
must also be replaced.
Be aware that objects placed on the
front seat can cause the indicator to
come on.
If no weight is detected on the front
seat, the airbag will be automatically
shut off. However, the indicator will
not come on.
The passenger airbag off indicator
maycomeonandoffrepeatedlyif
the total weight on the seat is near
the airbag cutoff threshold.
If an adult or teenage passenger is
riding in front, move the seat as far
to the rear as possible, and have the
passenger sit upright and wear the
seat belt properly.
If the indicator comes on with no
front seat passenger and no objects
on the seat, or with an adult riding
there, something may be interfering
with the weight sensors. Look for
and remove:
Any items under the front
passenger’s seat.
Any object, hanging on the seat or
in the seat-back pocket.
Take your vehicle to an
authorized dealer as soon as
possible. If you ignore this
indication, your airbags may not
operate properly.
Anyobjectthatistouchingthe
rear of the seat-back.
If no obstructions are found, have
your vehicle checked by a dealer as
soon as possible.
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Airbag Service
An airbag ever inflates.
The SRS indicator alerts you to a
problem.
30
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Together, airbags and
seat belts provide the best
protection.
Tampering could cause
the airbags to deploy, possibly
causing very serious injury.
If water or
another liquid soaks into a seat-
back, it can prevent the side airbag
cutoff system from working
properly.
Improperly replacing
or covering front seat-back covers
can prevent your side airbags from
inflating during a side impact.
This could make the
driver’s seat position sensor or the
front passenger’s weight sensors
ineffective. If it is necessary to
remove or modify a front seat to
accommodate a person with
disabilities, first contact Honda
Automobile Customer Service at
(800) 999-1009.
Even if your
airbags do not inflate, your dealer
should inspect the driver’s seat
position sensor, the front
passenger’s weight sensors, the
front seat belt tensioners, and all
seat belts worn during the crash to
make sure they are operating
properly.
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Additional Safety Precautions
Donotattempttodeactivateyour
airbags.
Do not tamper with airbag
components or wiring for any
reason.
Do not expose the front passenger’s
seat-back to liquid.
Do not cover or replace front seat-
back covers without consulting
your dealer.
Do not remove or modify a f ront
seat without consulting your
dealer.
If your vehicle has a moderate to
severe impact.
Driver and Passenger Safety
31
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
If you have children, or ever need to
drive with a child in your vehicle, be
sure to read this section. It begins
with important general guidelines,
then presents special information for
infants, small children, and larger
children.
Each year, many children are injured
or killed in vehicle crashes because
they are either unrestrained or not
properly restrained. In fact, vehicle
accidents are the number one cause
of the death of children ages 12 and
under.
To reduce the number of child
deaths and injuries, every state and
Canadian province requires that
infants and children be properly
restrained when they ride in a
vehicle.
(see pages ).
(see pages ).
Children depend on adults to protect
them. However, despite their best
intentions, many adults do not know
how to protect child
passengers.
37 48
49 52
properly
Protecting Children General Guidelines
All Children Must Be Restrained
Infants and small children must be
restrained in an approved child seat
that is properly secured to the
vehicle
Larger children must be restrained
with a lap/shoulder belt and ride on
a booster seat until the seat belt fits
them properly
32
Children who are unrestrained
or improperly restrained can be
seriously injured or killed in a
crash.
Any child too small for a seat
belt should be properly
restrained in a child seat. A
larger child should be properly
restrained with a seat belt and
use a booster seat if necessary.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
Front airbags have been designed to
help protect adults in a moderate to
severe frontal collision. To do this,
the passenger’s front airbag is quite
large, and it can inflate with enough
force to cause very serious injuries.
If the vehicle seat is
too far forward, or the child’s head is
thrown forward during a collision, an
inflating front airbag can strike the
child with enough force to kill or
very seriously injure a small child.
Whenever possible,
larger children should sit in the back
seat, on a booster seat if needed, and
be properly restrained with a seat
belt (see page for important
information about protecting larger
children).
Children who ride in the back are
less likely to be injured by striking
interior vehicle parts during a
collision or hard braking. Also,
children cannot be injured by an
inflating front airbag when they ride
in the back.
Even though your vehicle has an
advanced front airbag system that
automatically turns the passenger’s
front airbag off (see page ),
please follow these guidelines:
If
the airbag inflates, it can hit the back
of the child seat with enough force
to kill or very seriously injure an
infant.
According to accident statistics,
children of all ages and sizes are
safer when they are restrained in a
back seat. The National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration and
Transport Canada recommend that
all children aged 12 and under be
properly restrained in a back seat.
Some states have laws restricting
where children may ride.
29
49
CONTINUED
Protecting Children General Guidelines
Small Children
Placing a f orward-f acing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s front airbag can
be hazardous.
Larger Children
Children who have outgrown child
seats are also at risk of being injured
or killed by an inflating passenger’s
front airbag.Infants
Never put a rear-facing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s front airbag.
All Children Should Sit in a Back
Seat
The Passenger’s Front Airbag
Can Pose Serious Risks
Driver and Passenger Safety
33
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
To remind you of the passenger’s
front airbag hazards, and that
children must be properly restrained
in a back seat, your vehicle has
warninglabelsonthedashboard
(U.S. models) and on the front visors.
Please read and follow the
instructions on these labels.
Protecting Children General Guidelines
Canadian Models
U.S. Models
34
SUN VISORS DASHBOARD
SUN VISORS
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
Many parents say they prefer to put
an infant or a small child in the front
passenger seat so they can watch the
child, or because the child requires
attention.
Placing a child in the front seat
exposes the child to hazards in a
frontal collision, and paying close
attention to a child distracts the
driver from the important tasks of
driving, placing both of you at risk.
Your vehicle has a back seat where
children can be properly restrained.
If you ever have to carry a group of
children, and a child must ride in
front:
Place the largest child in the front
seat, provided the child is large
enough to wear the lap/shoulder
belt properly (see page ).
If a child requires close physical
attention or frequent visual contact,
we strongly recommend that another
adult ride with the child in the back
seat. The back seat is far safer for a
child than the front.
Move the vehicle seat as far to the
rear as possible (see pages and
).
Have the child sit upright and well
backintheseat(seepage ).
Make sure the seat belt is properly
positioned and secured (see page
).
14
49
98
15
100
If You Must Drive with Several
Children
If a Child Requires Close
Attention
Protecting Children General Guidelines
Driver and Passenger Safety
35
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
During a crash, the
belt could press deep into the child
and cause serious or fatal injuries.
If they do, they
could be very seriously injured in a
crash.
Children who play in vehicles
can accidentally get trapped inside.
Teach your children not to play in
or around vehicles. Know how to
operate the emergency In-Bed
Trunk opener and decide if your
children should be shown how to
use this feature (see page ).
Opening or
closing the tailgate could cause
accidental injuries.
Even very young
children learn how to unlock
vehicle doors, turn on the ignition
switch, and open the windows,
which can lead to accidental injury
or death.
If you are not wearing a
seat belt in a crash, you could be
thrown forward and crush the
child against the dashboard or a
seat-back. If you are wearing a
seat belt, the child can be torn
from your arms and be seriously
hurt or killed.
If a child wraps a loose
seat belt around their neck, they
can be seriously or fatally injured.
(See pages and for how to
activate and deactivate the
lockable retractor.)
For example, infants and small
childrenleftinavehicleonahot
day can die from heatstroke. A
child left alone with the key in the
ignition switch can accidentally set
the vehicle in motion, possibly
injuring themselves or others.
Leaving children without
adult supervision is illegal in most
states and Canadian provinces,
and can be very hazardous.
This can prevent
children from accidentally falling
out (see page ).
96
44 45
84
Additional Safety Precautions
Protecting Children General Guidelines
Never put a seat belt over yourself
and a child.
Never let two children use the
same seat belt.
Lock all doors and the In-Bed
Trunk when your vehicle is not in
use.
Teach your children not to play on
the pickup bed.
Keep vehicle keys/remote
transmitters out of the reach of
children.
Neverholdaninfantorchildon
your lap.
Make sure any unused seat belt
that a child can reach is buckled,
the lockable retractor is activated,
and the belt is fully retracted and
locked.
Do not leave children alone in a
vehicle.
Use the childproof door locks to
prevent children from opening the
rear doors.
36
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
An infant must be properly
restrained in a rear-facing, reclining
child seat until the child reaches the
seat maker’s weight or height limit
for the seat, and the child is at least
one year old.
Only a rear-facing child seat provides
proper support for a baby’s head,
neck, and back.
Two types of seats may be used: a
seat designed exclusively for infants,
or a convertible seat used in the rear-
facing, reclining mode.
If placed
facing forward, an infant could be
very seriously injured during a
frontal collision.
A rear-facing child seat can be placed
in any seating position in the back
seat, but not in the front.
If the passenger’s front airbag
inflates, it can hit the back of the
child seat with enough force to kill or
seriously injure an infant.
When properly installed, a rear-
facing child seat may prevent the
driver or a front passenger from
moving their seat as far back as
recommended, or from locking their
seat-back in the desired position.
It can also interfere with proper
operation of the passenger’s
advanced front airbag system.
Protecting Infants
Child Seat Type
Do not put a rear-facing child seat in
a forward-facing position.
Never put a
rear-facing child seat in the front
seat.
Child Seat Placement
Protecting Infants and Small Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
37
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Of the different seats available, we
recommend those that have a five-
point harness system as shown.
In any of these situations, we
strongly recommend that you install
the child seat directly behind the
front passenger’s seat, move the seat
as far forward as needed, and leave it
unoccupied. Or, you may wish to get
a smaller rear-facing child seat.
A child who is at least one year old,
and who fits within the child seat
maker’s weight and height limits,
should be restrained in a forward-
facing, upright child seat.
If the vehicle seat is too
far forward, or the child’s head is
thrown forward during a collision, an
inflating airbag can strike the child
with enough force to cause very
serious or fatal injuries.
We strongly recommend placing a
forward-facing child seat in a back
seat, not the front.
We also recommend that a small
child use the child seat until the child
reaches the weight or height limit
for the seat.
Protecting Infants and Small Children
Protecting Small Children
Child Seat Type
Placing a f orward-f acing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s airbag can be
hazardous.
Child Seat Placement
38
Placing a rear-facing child seat
in the front seat can result in
serious injury or death during a
collision.
Always place a rear-facing child
seat in the back seat, not the
front.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Since LATCH-compatible child seats
are easier to install and reduce the
possibility of improper installation,
we recommend selecting this style.
We also recommend selecting a
LATCH-compatible seat with a rigid,
rather than a flexible, anchor (see
page ).
In seating positions and vehicles not
equipped with LATCH, a LATCH-
compatible child seat can be installed
using a seat belt.
Whatever type of seat you choose, to
provide proper protection, a child
seat should meet three
requirements:
Look for FMVSS
213 or CMVSS 213 on the box.
Rear-facing for infants, forward-
facing for small children.
When buying a child seat, you need
to choose either a conventional child
seat, or one designed for use with
the lower anchors and tethers for
children (LATCH) system.
Conventional child seats must be
secured to a vehicle with a seat belt,
whereas LATCH-compatible seats
are secured by attaching the seat to
hardware built into each rear seating
position in the back seat.
If it is necessary to put a forward-
facing child seat in the front, move
the vehicle seat as far to the rear as
possible, and be sure the child seat is
firmly secured to the vehicle and the
child is properly strapped in the seat.
Even with advanced front airbags
that automatically turn the
passenger’s front airbag off (see
page ), a back seat is the safest
place for a small child.
1.
2.
41
29
CONTINUED
Protecting Infants and Small Children, Selecting a Child Seat
Selecting a Child Seat
The child seat should meet U.S. or
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard 213.
The child seat should be of the
proper type and size to fit the child.
Driver and Passenger Safety
39
Placing a forward-facing child
seat in the front seat can result
in serious injury or death if the
front airbag inflates.
Ifyoumustplaceaforward-
facing child seat in front, move
the vehicle seat as far back as
possible, and properly restrain
the child.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
After selecting a proper child seat
and a good place to install the seat,
there are three main steps in
installing the seat:
All child seats must be
secured to the vehicle with the lap
part of a lap/shoulder belt or with
the LATCH (lower anchors and
tethers for children) system. A
child whose seat is not properly
secured to the vehicle can be
endangered in a crash.
After installing a child
seat, push and pull the seat
forward and from side-to-side to
verify that it is secure.
A child seat secured with a seat belt
should be installed as firmly as
possible. However, it does not need
to be ‘‘rock solid.’’ Some side-to-side
movement can be expected and
should not reduce the child seat’s
effectiveness.
If the child seat is not secure, try
installing it in a different seating
position, or use a different style of
child seat that can be firmly secured.
Before purchasing a conventional
child seat, or using a previously
purchased one, we recommend that
you test the seat in the specific
vehicle seating position or positions
where the seat will be used.
Make sure the child is properly
strappedinthechildseat
according to the child seat maker’s
instructions. A child who is not
properly secured in a child seat
can be seriously injured in a crash.
The following pages provide
guidelines on how to properly install
a child seat. A forward-facing child
seat is used in all examples, but the
instructions are the same for rear-
facing child seats.
3.
1.
2.
3.
Selecting a Child Seat, Installing a Child Seat
Installing a Child Seat
Properly secure the child seat to
the vehicle.
Make sure the child seat is firmly
secured.
The child seat should fit the
vehicle seating position (or
positions) where it will be used.
Secure the child in the child seat.
40
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To install a LATCH-compatible child
seat:
Make sure there are no objects
near the anchors that could
prevent a secure connection
between the child seat and the
anchors.
When using the tether strap on
the child seat, attach the tether
strap hook to the center tether
anchor before installing the child
seat to the lower anchors for the
LATCH system, because the
center tether anchor is positioned
behind the child seat.
If needed, move the seat belt
buckle or tongue away from the
lower anchors.
Your vehicle is equipped with
LATCH (lower anchors and tethers
for children) at the rear seats.
The lower anchors are located
between the seat-back and seat
bottom, and are to be used only with
a child seat designed for use with
LATCH.
The location of each lower anchor is
indicated by a small button above the
anchor point.
Whenever using the center tether
anchor point, make sure to push
down the head restraint to the lowest
position, route the strap over the
seat-back, then around the upper
guide before attaching the tether
strap hook to the center tether
anchor (see page ).
1.
2.
3.
46
CONTINUED
On the center seating position
Installing a Child Seat
Installing a Child Seat with
LATCH
Driver and Passenger Safety
41
BUTTON
UPPER GUIDE
CENTER TETHER ANCHOR
LATCH
ANCHOR
POINTS
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Make sure the head restraint is in
the lowest position. Lift the cover,
then route the tether strap around
the upper guide. Route the tether
strap downward properly, making
sure the strap is not twisted, then
attach the strap hook to the center
tether anchor.
Place the child seat on the vehicle
seat, then attach the seat to the
lower anchors according to the
child seat maker’s instructions.
Some LATCH-compatible seats
have a rigid-type connector as
shown above.
Other LATCH-compatible seats
have a flexible-type connector as
shown above.
Whatever type you have, follow
the child seat maker’s instructions
for adjusting or tightening the fit.
5.
4.
Installing a Child Seat
42
Flexible typeRigid type
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Lift the head restraint (see page
), then route the tether strap
over the seat-back and through
the head restraint legs.
Lift the cover, then route the
tether strap around the upper
guide. Route the tether strap
downward properly, making sure
the strap is not twisted, then
attach the strap hook to the tether
anchor on the outside of the seat
bottom (see page ).
Push and pull the child seat
forward and from side-to-side to
verify that it is secure.
Tighten the strap according to the
seat maker’s instructions.
6. 7.
8.
102
46
On the outer seating position
Installing a Child Seat
Driver and Passenger Safety
43
UPPER GUIDE
Outer Position
UPPER GUIDE
Center Position TETHER ANCHORTETHER ANCHOR
Main Menu
Table of Contents
When not using the LATCH system,
all child seats must be secured to the
vehicle with the lap part of a lap/
shoulder belt.
With the child seat in the desired
seating position, route the belt
through the child seat according
to the seat maker’s instructions,
then insert the latch plate into the
buckle.
To activate the lockable retractor,
slowly pull the shoulder part of the
belt all the way out until it stops,
then let the belt feed back into the
retractor.
After the belt has retracted, tug on
it. If the belt is locked, you will not
be able to pull it out. If you can pull
thebeltout,itisnotlocked,and
you will need to repeat these steps.
In addition, the lap/shoulder belts in
all seating positions except the
driver’s have a lockable retractor
that must be activated to secure a
child seat.
If you place the child seat in the rear
center seating position and use the
tether strap for additional security,
make sure to push down the head
restraint to the lowest position and
hook the tether strap hook to the
anchor before securing the child seat
with the lap/shoulder belt. Refer to
page for how to route the tether
strap properly.
1. 2.
3.
46
Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/
Shoulder Belt
Installing a Child Seat
44
Main Menu
Table of Contents
After confirming that the belt is
locked, grab the shoulder part of
the belt near the buckle, and pull
up to remove any slack from the
lap part of the belt. Remember, if
the lap part of the belt is not tight,
the child seat will not be secure.
Push and pull the child seat
forward and from side-to-side to
verify that it is secure enough to
stay upright during normal driving
maneuvers. If the child seat is not
secure, unlatch the belt, allow it to
retract fully, then repeat these
steps.
To remove slack, it may help to
putweightonthechildseat,or
push on the back of the seat while
pulling up on the belt.
To deactivate the lockable retractor
and remove a child seat, unlatch the
buckle, unroute the seat belt, and let
the belt fully retract.
4. 5.
Installing a Child Seat
Driver and Passenger Safety
45
Main Menu
Table of Contents
When using a tether anchor, always
hook the tether strap through the
upper guide to route it properly.
Since a tether can provide additional
security to the lap/shoulder belt
installation, we recommend using a
tether whenever one is required or
available.
Each outer seating position has a
tether anchor at the outside of the
seat bottom. The center seating
position has a tether anchor between
the lower anchors for the LATCH-
compatible child seat. Each anchor
point is shown above.
Lift the cover, then hook the
tether strap through the upper
guide as shown.
After properly securing the child
seat (see page ), lift the head
restraint, then route the tether
strap over the seat-back and
through the head restraint legs.
A child seat with a tether can be
installed in any seating position in
the back seat.
1.
2.
44
Installing a Child Seat
Installing a Child Seat with a
Tether
Using an Outer Tether Anchor
46
COVER
UPPER
GUIDE
UPPER GUIDE
CENTER
TETHER
ANCHOR
OUTER
TETHER
ANCHOR
OUTER TETHER ANCHOR
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Route the tether strap downward
properly, making sure the strap is
not twisted.
Attach the tether strap hook to the
outertetheranchorontheoutside
of the seat bottom.
Make sure to attach the tether strap
hook to the anchor before installing
the child seat, because the tether
anchor is positioned behind the child
seat.
Place the child seat on the rear
seat.
Push down the rear center head
restraint to the lowest position.
Route the tether strap over the
seat-back, lift the cover, then hook
the tether strap through the upper
guide as shown.
Route the tether strap downward
properly along the seat-back,
making sure the strap is not
twisted.
Tighten the strap according to the
seat maker’s instructions.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
3.
4.
CONTINUED
Installing a Child Seat
Using the Center Tether Anchor
Driver and Passenger Safety
47
UPPER GUIDE
CENTER TETHER ANCHOR
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Attach the tether strap hook to the
center tether anchor between the
loweranchorsfortheLATCH-
compatible child seat.
Properlysecurethechildseat(see
page ), then tighten the tether
strap according to the seat maker’s
instructions.
Whenever using the tether strap,
make sure to route the strap through
the upper guide before attaching the
tether strap hook to the tether
anchor. If the tether strap is not
routed properly and secured, the
child seat may not be secured. This
could lead to serious injury or death.
5.
6.
44
Installing a Child Seat
48
UPPER GUIDE
CENTER TETHER ANCHOR
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The following pages give
instructions on how to check proper
seat belt fit, what kind of booster
seat to use if one is needed, and
important precautions for a child
who must sit in front.
To determine if a lap/shoulder belt
properly fits a child, have the child
put on the seat belt, then ask
yourself:
Does the child sit all the way back
against the seat?
Do the child’s knees bend
comfortably over the edge of the
seat?
When a child reaches the
recommended weight or height limit
for a forward-facing child seat, the
child should sit in a back seat on a
booster seat and wear a lap/shoulder
belt.
1.
2.
CONTINUED
Protecting Larger Children
Checking Seat Belt Fit
Driver and Passenger Safety
49
Allowing a child age 12 or under
to sit in front can result in injury
or death if the passenger’s front
airbag inflates.
If a child must ride in front,
move the vehicle seat as far
back as possible, use a booster
seat if needed, have the child
sit up properly and wear the
seat belt properly.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Booster seats can be high-back or
low-back. Whichever style you select,
make sure the booster seat meets
federal safety standards (see page
) and that you follow the booster
seat maker’s instructions.
If a child who uses a booster seat
must ride in front, move the vehicle
seat as far back as possible and be
sure the child is wearing the seat
belt properly.
A child may continue using a booster
seat until the tops of their ears are
even with the top of the vehicle’s or
booster’s seat-back. A child of this
height should be tall enough to use
the lap/shoulder belt without a
booster seat.
Does the shoulder belt cross
between the child’s neck and arm?
Is the lap part of the belt as low as
possible, touching the child’s
thighs?
Will the child be able to stay
seated like this for the whole trip?
If you answer yes to all these
questions, the child is ready to wear
the lap/shoulder belt correctly. If
you answer no to any question, the
child needs to ride on a booster seat.
A child who has outgrown a forward-
facing child seat should ride in a
back seat and use a booster seat
until the lap/shoulder belt fits them
properly without the booster.
Some states and Canadian provinces
also require children to use a booster
seat until they reach a given age or
weight (e.g., 6 years or 60 lbs). Be
sure to check current laws in the
states or provinces where you intend
to drive.
3.
4.
5.
39
Protecting Larger Children
Using a Booster Seat
50
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you decide that a child can safely
ride up front, be sure to:
Carefully read the owner’s manual,
and make sure you understand all
seat belt instructions and all safety
information.
Move the vehicle seat to the rear-
most position.
Have the child sit up straight, back
against the seat, and feet on or
near the floor.
Check that the child’s seat belt is
properly and securely positioned.
Physically, a child must be large
enough for the lap/shoulder belt to
properly fit (see pages and ). If
the seat belt does not fit properly,
with or without the child sitting on a
booster seat, the child should not sit
in front.
To safely ride in front, a child must
be able to follow the rules, including
sitting properly, and wearing the seat
belt properly throughout a ride.
A side airbag also poses risks. If any
part of a larger child’s body is in the
path of a deploying side airbag, the
child could receive possibly serious
injuries.
If the passenger’s front airbag
inflates in a moderate to severe
frontal collision, the airbag can cause
serious injuries to a child who is
unrestrained, improperly restrained,
sitting too close to the airbag, or out
of position.
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport
Canada recommend that all children
age 12 and under be properly
restrained in the back seat.
Of course, children vary widely. And
while age may be one indicator of
when a child can safely ride in front,
there are other important factors you
should consider.
Supervise the child. Even a mature
child sometimes needs to be
reminded to fasten the seat belt or
sit properly.
14 49
Physical Size
Maturity
When Can a Larger Child Sit in
Front
Protecting Larger Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
51
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This could result
in serious neck injuries during a
crash.
This could
cause very serious injuries during
a crash. It also increases the
chance that the child will slide
under the belt in a crash and be
injured.
If they do, they
could be very seriously injured in a
crash.
Devices intended to
improve a child’s comfort or
reposition the shoulder part of a
seat belt can make the belt less
effective and increase the chance
of serious injury in a crash.
Protecting Larger Children
Additional Safety Precautions
Do not let a child wear a seat belt
across the neck.
Do not let a child put the shoulder
part of a seat belt behind the back
or under the arm.
Two children should never use the
same seat belt.
Do not put any accessories on a
seat belt.
52
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your vehicle’s exhaust contains
carbon monoxide gas. Carbon
monoxide should not enter the
vehicle in normal driving if you
maintain your vehicle properly and
follow the information on this page.
High levels of carbon monoxide can
collect rapidly in enclosed areas,
such as a garage. Do not run the
engine with the garage door closed.
Even with the door open, run the
engine only long enough to move the
vehicle out of the garage.
Have the exhaust system inspected
for leaks whenever:
The vehicle is raised for an oil
change.
You notice a change in the sound
of the exhaust.
The vehicle was in an accident
that may have damaged the
underside.
With a truck cap installed and the
back window open, engine exhaust
may enter the vehicle and cause a
hazardous condition. Keep the back
window tightly closed whenever you
drive with a truck cap installed.
If you must sit in your parked vehicle
with the engine running, even in an
unconfined area, adjust the heating
and cooling system/climate control
system as follows:
Select the fresh air mode.
Select the mode.
Turn the fan on high speed.
Set the temperature control to a
comfortable setting.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Carbon Monoxide Hazard
Driver and Passenger Safety
53
Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.
Breathing it can cause
unconsciousness and even kill
you.
Avoid any enclosed areas or
activities that expose you to
carbon monoxide.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
These labels are in the locations
shown. They warn you of potential
hazards that could cause serious
injury or death. Read these labels
carefully.
If a label comes off or becomes hard
to read (except for the U.S.
dashboard label which may be
removed by the owner), contact your
dealer for a replacement.
U.S. models
Canadian models
U.S. models only
U.S. models only
Safety Labels
54
RADIATOR CAP
DASHBOARD
SUN VISOR
SUN VISORS
Main Menu
Table of Contents
U.S. models
Canadian models
U.S. models
Canadian models
Canadian modelsU.S. models
Safety Labels
Driver and Passenger Safety
55
HOOD
DOORJAMBS
PICKUP BED
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Main Menu
This section gives information about
the controls and displays that
contribute to the daily operation of
your vehicle. All the essential
controls are within easy reach.
...........................Control Locations . 58
............................Instrument Panel . 59
..........Instrument Panel Indicators . 61
.............................................Gauges . 70
Controls Near the Steering
...........................................Wheel . 74
........................Multi-Control Lever . 75
...................Headlight Control Dial . 76
........Instrument Panel Brightness . 78
.................Hazard Warning Button . 79
..........Steering Wheel Adjustment . 79
..................................................Keys . 80
........................Immobilizer System . 81
................................Ignition Switch . 82
......................................Door Locks . 83
.......................Remote Transmitter . 89
.......................Dual-Action Tailgate . 92
...............................In-Bed Trunk . 95
.................................................Seats . 98
..................................Seat Heaters . 104
............................Power Windows . 105
.......................................Moonroof . 108
...............................Parking Brake . 109
...........................................Mirrors . 110
.........Interior Convenience Items . 112
.........................Center Console . 113
.......Console Compartments . 113
.........................Cargo Hooks . 114
.....................Beverage Holders . 114
..................................Glove Box . 115
................................Coat Hooks . 115
....................Sunglasses Holder . 115
........Accessory Power Sockets . 116
...................................Sun Visor . 117
............................Vanity Mirror . 117
...............................Interior Lights . 118
.....................................Bed Lights . 120
Instruments and Controls
Instruments and Controls
57
TM
Main Menu
＊
＊
＊
Ifequipped
Control Locations
58
HOOD RELEASE
HANDLE
PARKING BRAKE
PEDAL
GLOVE BOX
AUDIO SYSTEM
POWER WINDOW
SWITCHES
INSTRUMENT PANEL INDICATORS
GAUGES
HEATING/COOLING
CONTROLS
CENTER CONSOLE
POWER DOOR LOCK
MASTER SWITCH
MIRROR CONTROLS
Vehicle with navigation system is shown.
CLIMATE CONTROL
SYSTEM
ACCESSORY POWER SOCKETS
PARKING BRAKE
RELEASE HANDLE
FUEL FILL DOOR
RELEASE HANDLE
AUXILIARY INPUT
JACK
REAR VIEW MIRROR WITH
COMPASS
(P.59)
(P.70)
(P.109)
(P.111)
(P.83)
(P.105)
(P.109) (P.113) (P.116)
(P.115)
(P.128)
(P.122)
(P.161)
(P.133)
(P.168)
(P.179)
(P.181)
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Instrument Panel
Instruments and Controls
U.S. models
59
IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
INDICATOR
WASHER LEVEL
INDICATOR
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR
LAMP
LOW OIL PRESSURE
INDICATOR
VSA ACTIVATION INDICATOR
VTM-4 INDICATOR
HIGH BEAM INDICATOR
A/T TEMPERATURE INDICATOR
LIGHTS ON INDICATOR
TPMS INDICATOR
CHARGING SYSTEM
INDICATOR
PARKING BRAKE AND
BRAKE SYSTEM
INDICATOR
SIDE AIRBAG OFF
INDICATOR
LOW FUEL INDICATOR
CRUISE CONTROL INDICATOR
BACK WINDOW OPEN
INDICATOR
LOW TIRE PRESSURE
INDICATOR
MAINTENANCE MINDER
INDICATOR
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM
INDICATOR
VEHICLE STABILITY
ASSIST (VSA) SYSTEM
INDICATOR
SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT
SYSTEM
INDICATOR
SEAT BELT
REMINDER
INDICATOR
BED LIGHTS ON INDICATOR
IN-BED TRUNK OPEN
INDICATOR
(P.67)
(P.66)
(P.66)
(P.66)
(P.68)
(P.69)
(P.62)
(P.63)
(P.62)
(P.62)
(P.69)
(P.67)
(P.68)
(P.67)
(P.62)
(P.63)
(P.65)
(P.62)
(P.61)
(P.65)
(P.65)
(P.63)
(P.69)
(P.64)
(P.65)
DOOR AND TAILGATE
OPEN MONITOR
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR
(P.68)
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Instrument Panel
Canadian models
60
IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
INDICATOR
WASHER LEVEL
INDICATOR
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR
LAMP
LOW OIL PRESSURE
INDICATOR
VSA ACTIVATION INDICATOR
VTM-4 INDICATOR
HIGH BEAM INDICATOR
A/T TEMPERATURE INDICATOR
LIGHTS ON INDICATOR
TPMS INDICATOR
CHARGING SYSTEM
INDICATOR
PARKING BRAKE AND
BRAKE SYSTEM
INDICATOR
SIDE AIRBAG OFF
INDICATOR
LOW FUEL INDICATOR
CRUISE CONTROL INDICATOR
BACK WINDOW OPEN
INDICATOR
LOW TIRE PRESSURE
INDICATOR
MAINTENANCE MINDER
INDICATOR
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM
INDICATOR
VEHICLE STABILITY
ASSIST (VSA) SYSTEM
INDICATOR
SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT
SYSTEM
INDICATOR
SEAT BELT
REMINDER
INDICATOR
DAY TIME RUNNING LIGHTS
INDICATOR
BED LIGHTS ON INDICATOR
IN-BED TRUNK OPEN
INDICATOR
(P.67)
(P.66)
(P.66)
(P.65)
(P.66)
(P.68)
(P.69)
(P.62)
(P.63)
(P.62)
(P.62)
(P.69)
(P.64)
(P.69)
(P.67)
(P.68)
(P.67)
(P.62)
(P.63)
(P.65)
(P.62)
(P.61)
(P.65)
(P.65)
(P.63)
(P.65)
DOOR AND TAILGATE
OPEN MONITOR
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR
(P.68)
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The instrument panel has many
indicators to give you important
information about your vehicle. This indicator comes on when you
turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position. It reminds you and your
passengers to fasten your seat belts.
A beeper also sounds if you have not
fastened your seat belt.
If you turn the ignition switch to the
ON (II) position before fastening
your seat belts, the beeper sounds,
and the indicator flashes. If you do
not fasten your seat belts before the
beeper stops, the indicator stops
flashing but remains on.
If your front passenger does not
fasten their seat belt, the indicator
comes on about 6 seconds after the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
(II) position.
If either of you do not fasten your
seat belt while driving, the beeper
will sound and the indicator will flash
again at regular intervals. For more
information, see page .18
Instrument Panel Indicators
Seat Belt Reminder
Indicator
Instruments and Controls
61
Main Menu
Table of Contents
a problem. For more information, see
page 289.
Theenginecanbeseverelydamaged
ifthisindicatorflashesorstayson
whentheengineisrunning.For
moreinformation,seepage.
Ifthisindicatorcomesonwhenthe
engineisrunning,thebatteryisnot
beingcharged.Formoreinformation,
seepage.
T
hisindicat
orcomesonwhenyou
turntheignitionswitchtotheON
(II)position.Ifitcomesonatany
othertime,itindicatesthatthe
passenger’ ssideairbaghas
automaticallyshutoff.Formore
information,seepage.
Thisindicatorcomesonforseveral
secondswhenyouturntheignition
switchtotheON(II)position.Ifit
comesonatanyothertime,it
indicatesapotentialproblemwith
yourfrontairbags.Thisindicatorwill
alsoalertyoutoapotentialproblem
withyoursideairbags,passenger’ s
sideairbagautomaticcutoffsystem,
sidecurtainairbags,automaticseat
belttensioners,driver’ sseatposition
sensor,andthefrontpassenger’ s
weightsensors.Formore
information,seepage.
29
28
288
288
Malfunction Indicator
Lamp
Low Oil Pressure
Indicator
Charging System
Indicator
Supplemental Restraint
System Indicator Side Airbag Off
Indicator
Instrument Panel Indicators
62
U.S. Canada
If this indicator comes on while
driving, it means one of the engine’s
emissions control systems may have
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This indicator has two functions:
This indicator also blinks several
times when you turn the ignition
switch from the ON (II) position to
the ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0)
position.
If it stays on after you have fully
released the parking brake while
the engine is running, or if it
comes on while driving, there
could be a problem with the brake
system. For more information, see
page .
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position, and when the ignition
switch is turned to the START (III)
position. If it comes on at any other
time, there is a problem with the
ABS. If this happens, have your
vehicle checked at a dealer. With the
indicator on, your vehicle still has
normal braking ability but no anti-
lock brakes. For more information,
see page .
This indicator comes on for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position. It will
gooffifyouhaveinserteda
properly-coded ignition key. If it is
not a properly-coded key, the
indicator will blink and the engine
will not start (see page ).
Itcomesonwhenyouturnthe
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. It is a reminder to check
the parking brake. A beeper
sounds if you drive with the
parking brake not fully released.
Driving with the parking brake not
fully released can damage the
brakes and tires.
1.
2.
81
290
208
Anti-lock Brake System
(ABS) Indicator
Immobilizer System
IndicatorParking Brake
and Brake
System
Indicator
Instrument Panel Indicators
Instruments and Controls
63
U.S. Canada
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This monitor includes two functions;
the door open indicator and the
tailgate open indicator. This monitor
works with the ignition switch in any
position.
The specific door indicator comes on
in this monitor if any door is not
closed tightly.
Thetailgateindicatorcomeson
whenthetailgateisswungopenorif
it is not closed completely after you
swing it closed.
If the tailgate is swung open or is not
closed tightly, you will hear six beeps
and see the indicator blinking when
you turn the ignition switch to the
ON (II) position. The beeper also
sounds and the indicator blinks when
you move the shift lever out of the
Park or neutral position.
The tailgate open indicator does not
monitor the tailgate when it is
dropped open.
If the driver does not fasten the seat
belt and the tailgate is swung open,
the seat belt reminder alarm will
sound at first, then the tailgate open
reminder beeper will sound.
For more information on the tailgate,
see page .
The left or right turn signal indicator
blinks when you signal a lane change
or turn. If an indicator does not blink
or blinks rapidly, it usually means
one of the turn signal bulbs is
burned out (see pages and ).
Replace the bulb as soon as possible,
since other drivers cannot see that
you are signaling.
When you press the hazard warning
button, both turn signal indicators
and all turn signals on the outside of
the vehicle flash.
94
256
257
Turn Signal and
Hazard Warning
Indicators
Door and Tailgate Open Monitor
Instrument Panel Indicators
64
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This indicator comes on when you
turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position with the headlight
switch off and the parking brake set.
It should go off when you turn on the
headlights or release the parking
brake. If it comes on at any other
time, it means there is a problem
withtheDRL.Theremayalsobea
problem with the high beam
headlights.
This indicator comes on with the
high beam headlights. For more
information, see page .
This indicator is located in the fuel
gauge. It comes on as a reminder
that you must refuel soon.
On Canadian models, this indicator
comes on with reduced brightness
when the daytime running lights
(DRL) are on (see page ).
This indicator comes on when the
washer fluid level is low. Add washer
fluid when you see this indicator
(see page ).
When the indicator comes on, there
is about 3.30 U.S. gal (12.5
)offuel
remaining in the tank before the
needle reaches E. There is a small
reserve of fuel remaining in the tank
when the needle does reach E.
This indicator comes on when you
set the cruise control. See page
for information on operating the
cruise control.
78
165
250
76
Canadian models only
‘‘Daytime Running
Lights’’ Indicator
High Beam Indicator Low Fuel Indicator
Washer Level Indicator
Cruise Control Indicator
Instrument Panel Indicators
Instruments and Controls
65
LOW FUEL INDICATOR
The main switch can be left on, even
when the system is not in use.
NOTE:
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This indicator monitors the
temperature of the automatic
transmission fluid. It should come on
for a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. If it comes on while driving,
it means the transmission fluid
temperature is too high. Pull to the
side of the road when it is safe, shift
to Park, and let the engine idle until
the indicator goes out.
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. If it comes on at any other
time, there is a problem in the 4WD
system. Take the vehicle to your
dealer to have it checked.
If the indicator blinks while driving,
the VTM-4 fluid temperature is too
high. Pull to the side of the road
when it is safe, shift to Park, and let
the engine idle until the indicator
goes out.
This indicator reminds you that the
exterior lights are on. It comes on
when you turn the headlight control
dial to either the or
position.
If you turn the ignition switch to
ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0)
without turning off the headlight
control dial, this indicator remains on.
A reminder chime will also sound
when you open the driver’s door.
Lights On Indicator A/T Temperature
Indicator
VTM-4 Indicator
Instrument Panel Indicators
66
Continuing to drive with the A/T
temperature indicator on may cause
serious damage to the transmission.
Continuing to drive with the VTM-4
indicator blinking may cause serious
damage to the system.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position.
This indicator reminds you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance. The
maintenance main items and sub
items will be displayed in the
information display. See page for
more information on the
maintenance minder.
This indicator goes off when your
dealer resets it after completing the
required maintenance service.
Ifitcomesonandstaysonatany
other time, or if it does not come on
when you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, there is a
problem with the VSA system. Take
your vehicle to a dealer to have it
checked. Without VSA, your vehicle
still has normal driving ability, but
will not have VSA traction and
stability enhancement. See page
for more information on the
VSA system.
It comes on along with the VSA
system indicator if there is a
problem with the VSA system.
It flashes when VSA is active (see
page ).
Itcomesonasareminderthatyou
have turned off the vehicle
stability assist (VSA) system.
This indicator has three functions:
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. For more information, see
page .
1.
2.
3.210
210
210
235
Vehicle Stability Assist
(VSA) System Indicator
VSA Activation Indicator Maintenance Minder
Indicator
Instrument Panel Indicators
Instruments and Controls
67
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. If it comes on while driving,
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position.
it indicates that one or more of your
vehicle’s tires are extremely low on
pressure.
If this happens, pull to the side of the
road when it is safe, check which tire
has lost the pressure on the tire
pressure monitor, and determine the
cause. If it is because of a flat tire,
replace the flat tire with the compact
spare (see page ), and have the
flat tire repaired as soon as possible.
If two or more tires are underinflated,
call a professional towing service
(see page ). Refer to page
for more information.
If this indicator comes on and stays
on at any other time, or if it does not
come on when you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position, there
is a problem with the TPMS. With
this indicator on, the low tire
pressure indicator and the tire
pressure monitor will not come on
when a tire loses pressure. Take the
vehicle to your dealer to have the
system checked.
This monitor normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. While driving, the
appropriate tire indicator will come
on, along with the low tire pressure
indicator, if a tire is extremely
underinflated or has suddenly lost
pressure. See
forwhattodoifthis
indicator comes on.
274
296
204
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) Indicator
Low Tire Pressure
Indicator
Tire Pressure Monitor
Low Tire Pressure
Indicator
Instrument Panel Indicators
68
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This indicator reminds you that the
bed lights are on. With the shift lever
in the Park position, they come on
when you push the light switch on
the dashboard, swing open the
tailgate, or open the In-Bed Trunk.
This indicator reminds you that the
In-Bed Trunk is open. If you do not
close it, the indicator stays on for
about 3 minutes. See page for
more information.
This indicator reminds you that the
back window is not completely
closed when you turn the ignition
switch from the ON (II) position to
the ACCESSORY (I) or the LOCK
(0) position. With the ignition switch
in the ACCESSORY (I) position, it
goes off after about 30 seconds. With
the ignition switch in the LOCK (0)
position, it goes off after about 3
minutes.
If you turn the ignition switch to the
ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0)
position without turning off the bed
lights, this indicator will remain on,
andthengooffafter20minutes.See
page for more information. If you remove the ignition key, turn
off the lights, and open the driver’s
door without closing the back
window, you will hear five beeps and
see the indicator blink. If you do not
close the back window before the
beeper stops, the indicator stops
blinking but remains on. It will go off
after about 3 minutes. See page
for more information.
120
95
106
Back Window Open
Indicator
Bed Lights On Indicator In-Bed Trunk Open
Indicator
Instrument Panel Indicators
Instruments and Controls
69
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To switch the information display
between the odometer, trip meter
and outside temperature (if
equipped), and engine oil life and
maintenance service items, press the
SELECT button repeatedly.
This shows the total distance your
vehicle has been driven. It measures
miles in U.S. models and kilometers
in Canadian models.
It is illegal under U.S. federal law and
Canadian provincial regulations to
disconnect, reset, or alter the
odometer with the intent to change
the number of miles or kilometers
indicated.
Odometer
Gauges
70
SPEEDOMETERTACHOMETER TEMPERATURE GAUGE
FUEL GAUGE
SELECT
BUTTON
TRIP METER
RESET
BUTTON
OUTSIDE
TEMPERATURE
INDICATOR
U.S. model is shown.
INFORMATION
DISPLAY
ODOMETER/
TIGHTEN FUEL
CAP MESSAGE
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This meter shows the number of
miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada)
driven since you last reset it.
There are two trip meters: TRIP A
and TRIP B. Switch between these
displays by pressing the SELECT
button repeatedly. Each trip meter
works independently, so you can
keep track of two different distances.
To reset a trip meter, display it, and
then press and hold the RESET
button until the number resets to
‘‘0.0’’. Both trip meters will reset if
the vehicle’s battery goes dead or is
disconnected. And both continue to
track mileage, even when only one is
displayed.
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, the meter you
last selected is displayed.
This shows how much fuel you have.
It may show slightly more or less
than the actual amount. The needle
returns to the bottom after you turn
off the ignition.
Trip Meter Fuel Gauge
Gauges
Instruments and Controls
71
SELECT BUTTON
RESET BUTTON
Avoid driving with an extremely low
fuel level. Running out of fuel could
cause the engine to misfire, damaging
the catalytic converter.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
±±
−−
−−−
−−−
This indicator displays the outside
temperature in Fahrenheit (U.S.
models) or Centigrade (Canadian
models).
The temperature sensor is in the
front bumper. Therefore, the
temperature reading can be affected
by heat reflection from the road
surface, engine heat, and the
exhaust from surrounding traffic.
This can cause an incorrect
temperature reading when your
speed is under 19 mph (30 km/h).
The sensor delays the indicator
update until it reaches the correct
outside temperature. This may take
several minutes.
If the outside temperature is
incorrectly displayed, you can adjust
it up 5°F in U.S. models ( 3°C in
Canadian models) warmer or cooler.
NOTE: The temperature must be
stabilized before doing this
procedure.
To adjust the outside temperature
indicator, make sure the outside
temperature indicator is shown in
thedisplay,thenpressandholdthe
RESET button for 10 seconds (the
TRIP A or B is also reset). The
following sequence will appear for 1
secondeach:0,1,2,3,4,5, 5, 4,
3, 2, 1, 0 (U.S.) or 0, 1, 2, 3,
3, 2, 1, 0 (Canada).
When it reaches the desired value,
release the RESET button. You
should see the new outside
temperature displayed.
In certain weather conditions,
temperature readings near freezing
(32°F, 0°C) could mean that ice is
forming on the road surface.
This shows the temperature of the
engine’s coolant. During normal
operation, the pointer should rise to
about the middle of the gauge. In
severe driving conditions, the pointer
may rise to the upper zone. If it
reaches the red (hot) mark, pull
safely to the side of the road. For
instructions and precautions on
checking the engine’s cooling
system, see page .286
If equipped
Temperature Gauge Outside Temperature Indicator
Gauges
72
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The information display in the
instrument panel shows you the
engine oil life and maintenance
service items when the ignition
switch is in the ON (II) position. This
information helps to keep you aware
of the periodic maintenance your
vehicle needs for continued trouble-
free driving. Refer to page for
more information.
If your fuel fill cap is loose or
missing, a ‘‘TIGHTEN FUEL CAP’’
message appears on the information
display after you start the engine.
Turn the engine off, and confirm the
fuel cap is installed. If it is, loosen it,
then retighten it until it clicks at least
once. When you restart the engine,
the message appears again. The
message goes off after several days
of normal driving once you tighten
or replace the fuel cap. To scroll to
another message, press the select
button.
If the system still detects a leak in
your vehicle's evaporative emissions
system, the malfunction indicator
lamp (MIL) comes on. If the fuel cap
was not already tightened, turn the
engine off, and check or retighten the
fuel cap until it clicks at least once.
The MIL goes off after several days of
normal driving once the cap is
tightened or replaced. If the MIL does
not go off, have your vehicle inspected
235
Maintenance Minder DisplayTighten Fuel Cap Message
Gauges
Instruments and Controls
73
by a dealer. For more information, see
page 289.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
To use the horn, press the pad around the ‘‘H’’ logo.
If equipped.
1
2
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
74
SHIFT LEVER
CRUISE BUTTON
CRUISE
CONTROLS
HORN
STEERING WHEEL
ADJUSTMENT
VTM-4 LOCK
Vehicle with navigation system is shown.
BED LIGHT SWITCH
MULTI-CONTROL LEVER
(WINDSHIELD WIPERS/
WASHERS/TURN SIGNALS/
HEADLIGHT HIGH BEAMS)
MOONROOF SWITCH
INTERIOR LIGHT
CONTROL SWITCH
INSTRUMENT PANEL
BRIGHTNESS
HEADLIGHT CONTROL
DIAL
RESET BUTTON
SELECT BUTTON
REMOTE AUDIO
CONTROLS
(P.108)
(P.75)
(P.120)
(P.76)
(P.165)
(P.161)
(P.79)
(P.165)
(P.118)
(P.78)
(P.70)
(P.70)
PASSENGER AIRBAG
OFF INDICATOR
(P.29)
HAZARD WARNING
BUTTON
(P.79)
SEAT HEATERS
(P.104)
(P.203)
(P.211)
VEHICLE STABILITY
ASSIST (VSA)
SYSTEM OFF SWITCH
(P.197)
1
2
2
2
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
OFF
INT: Intermittent
INT TIME ring
LO: Low speed
HI: High speed
MIST
Windshield washer (spray nozzles)
Turn signal
High beams
Flashhighbeams
The multi-control lever has many
functions, including windshield
wipers and washers, turn signals,
headlight high beams, and headlight
high beam flashing.
To select a position, turn the rotary
switch,pushthebuttonontheendof
the lever, or push the lever up, down,
forward, or backward.
The wipers are not activated.
The length of the wiper
interval is varied
automatically according to the
vehicle’s speed.
Vary the delay by turning the
INT TIME ring. If you turn it
to the shortest delay, the
wipers change to low speed
when the vehicle speed
exceeds 12 mph (20 km/h).
The wipers run at low speed.
The wipers run at high speed.
The wipers run at high speed
until you release the lever.
Push the
buttonontheendofthe
multi-control lever. The
washers spray until you
release the button. The
wipers run at low speed, then
complete one more sweep
after you release the button.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
OFF:
INT:
LO
HI
MIST:
Windshield Washer:
Multi-Control Lever
Instruments and Controls
75
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
OFF
Parking and indicator lights
Headlights
Push down on the
multi-control lever to signal a left
turn and up to signal a right turn. To
signal a lane change, push lightly on
the lever and hold it. The lever will
return to center when you release it
or complete a turn.
To turn on the high
beams, push the multi-control lever
forward until you hear a click. The
blue high beam indicator will come
on (see page ). Pull the lever back
to return to the low beams.
To flash the high beams, pull the
lever back lightly, then release it.
The high beams will stay on as long
as you hold the lever back.
Your vehicle has heating wires at the
bottom of the windshield to help
heat the wiper blades and the
windshield. If the outside
temperature is near freezing, the
heater turns on automatically when
you turn the ignition switch to the
ON (II) position. The heater turns
off automatically when the outside
temperature is above freezing.
This function helps to increase wiper
performance when the wiper arms
sit in the parked position in snowy or
icy conditions.
1.
2.
3.
65
Headlight Control DialTurn Signal
High Beams
Automatic Heated Wiper Zone
Multi-Control Lever, Headlights
76
Main Menu
Table of Contents
− If you remove the key from the
ignition switch with the headlight
control dial on, but do not open the
door, the lights will turn off after 10
minutes.
Turning the dial to
the ‘‘ ’’ position turns on the
parking lights, taillights, instrument
panel lights, and license plate lights.
Turning the dial to the ‘‘ ’’
position turns on the headlights. If
you leave the lights on and remove
the key from the ignition switch, you
will hear a reminder chime when you
open the driver’s door.
When the dial is in the ‘‘ ’’ or
‘‘ ’’ position, the lights on
indicator comes on as a reminder.
This indicator stays on if you leave
the lights on and turn the ignition
switch to the ACCESSORY (I) or
LOCK (0) position.
The automatic lighting off feature
turns off the headlights, all other
exterior lights, and the instrument
panel lights within 15 seconds of
removing the key from the ignition
switch and closing the driver’s door. The lights will turn on again when
you unlock or open the driver’s door.
This feature activates if you leave
the headlight control dial in the
‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ ’’ position, remove
the key, then open and close the
driver’s door.
If you unlock the door, but do not
open it within 15 seconds, the lights
go off. With the driver’s door open,
you will hear a lights-on reminder
chime.
Automatic Lighting Off FeatureHeadlights
Headlights
Instruments and Controls
77
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The dial on the instrument panel
controls the brightness of the
instrument panel lights and the
console compartment light. Turn the
dial to adjust the brightness.
With the headlight control dial off,
the high beam headlights and the
high beam indicator come on with
reduced brightness when you turn
the ignition switch to the ON (II)
position and release the parking
brake. They remain on until you turn
the ignition switch off, even if you
set the parking brake.
The headlights revert to normal
operation when you turn them on
with the headlight control dial.
The instrument panel will illuminate
with reduced brightness when you
unlock and open the driver’s door.
The brightness will increase and go
to a normal level when you insert the
key in the ignition switch.
If you do not insert the key in the
ignition switch after opening the
driver’s door, the illumination turns
off about 30 seconds after you close
the door.
If you insert the key but do not turn
the ignition switch to the ON (II)
position, the illumination turns off in
about 10 seconds.
The instrument panel brightness is
dimmedwhenyouturntheheadlight
controldialtothe‘‘ ’’or
‘‘ ’’ position to reduce glare at
night. To cancel it, turn the
instrument panel brightness control
dial upward fully until you hear a
click.
Canadian models only
Instrument Panel BrightnessDaytime Running Lights
Headlights, Instrument Panel Brightness
78
INSTRUMENT PANEL
BRIGHTNESS CONTROL DIAL
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Push the lever up to lock the
steering wheel in position.
Make sure you have securely
locked the steering wheel in place
by trying to move it up and down.
Make any steering wheel adjustment
before you start driving.
Move the steering wheel so it
points toward your chest, not
toward your face. Make sure you
can see the instrument panel
gauges and indicators.
Push the lever on the left side of
the steering column all the way
down.
Pushthebuttontoturnonthe
hazard warning lights (four-way
flashers). This causes all four
outside turn signals and both turn
indicators in the instrument panel to
flash. Use the hazard warning lights
if you need to park in a dangerous
area near heavy traffic, or if your
vehicle is disabled.
3.
4.1.
2.
Steering Wheel AdjustmentHazard Warning Button
Hazard Warning Button, Steering Wheel Adjustment
Instruments and Controls
79
Adjusting the steering wheel
position while driving may
cause you to lose control of the
vehicle and be seriously injured
inacrash.
Adjust the steering wheel only
when the vehicle is stopped.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
These keys contain electronic
circuits that are activated by the
immobilizer system. They will not
work to start the engine if the
circuits are damaged.
Protect the keys from direct
sunlight, high temperature, and
high humidity.
Donotdropthekeysorsetheavy
objects on them.
Keep the keys away from liquids.
If they get wet, dry them
immediately with a soft cloth.
The master key fits all the locks on
your vehicle. The valet key works
only in the ignition and the driver’s
door lock. You can keep the glove
boxlockedwhenyouleaveyour
vehicle and the valet key at a parking
facility.
You can also keep the In-Bed Trunk
locked by using the main switch in
theglovebox(seepage ).
Youshouldhavereceivedakey
number tag with your keys. You will
need this key number if you ever
have to get a lost key replaced. Use
only Honda-approved key blanks.
97
Keys
80
VALET KEY
(LIGHT GRAY)
MASTER KEY
WITH REMOTE
TRANSMITTER
KEY
NUMBER
TAG
Main Menu
Table of Contents
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, the immobilizer
system indicator should come on for
a few seconds, then go off. If the
indicator starts to blink, it means the
system does not recognize the
coding of the key. Turn the ignition
switch to the LOCK (0) position,
remove the key, reinsert it, and turn
the ignition switch to the ON (II)
position again.
The system may not recognize your
key’s coding if another immobilizer
key or other metal object (i.e. key
fob) is near the ignition switch when
you insert the key.
Do not attempt to alter this system
or add other devices to it. Electrical
problems could result that may make
your vehicle undrivable.
If the system repeatedly does not
recognize the coding of your key,
contact your dealer.
The immobilizer system protects
your vehicle from theft. If an
improperly-coded key (or other
device) is used, the engine’s fuel
system is disabled.
If you have lost your key and cannot
start the engine, contact your dealer.
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
Immobilizer System
Instruments and Controls
81
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
The ignition switch has four
positions: LOCK (0), ACCESSORY
(I), ON (II), and START (III).
You can insert or
remove the key only in this position.
To turn the key, the shift lever must
be in Park, and you must push the
key in slightly.
If the front wheels are turned, the
anti-theft lock may make it difficult
to turn the key. Firmly turn the
steering wheel to the left or right as
you turn the key.
You can
operate the audio system and the
accessory power sockets in this
position.
This is the normal key
position when driving. Several of the
indicators on the instrument panel
come on as a test when you turn the
ignition switch from the
ACCESSORY (I) to the ON (II)
position.
Use this position
only to start the engine. The switch
returns to the ON (II) position when
you let go of the key.
You will hear a reminder beeper if
you leave the key in the ignition
switch in the LOCK (0) or the
ACCESSORY (I) position and open
the driver’s door. Remove the key to
turn off the beeper.
TheshiftlevermustbeinPark(P)
before you can remove the key from
the ignition switch.
LOCK (0)
ACCESSORY (I)
ON (II)
START (III)
Ignition Switch
82
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To lock any passenger’s door when
getting out of the vehicle, push the
lock tab down, and close the door.
To lock the driver’s door, remove the
key from the ignition switch, and
push the lock tab down, or push the
front of the master switch, then
close the door.
Withthedriver’ sdooropenandthe
keyintheignition,bothmasterdoor
lockswitches will not lock, but they
will unlock. The lock feature is not
disabled if the driver’s door is closed.
Pushing the front of the switchonthe
open passenger’s door willlockall
doors and the In-Bed Trunk.
The lock tab on each door locks and
unlocks that door. Pulling up on the
driver’s door lock tab only unlocks
the driver’s door. To unlock the
driver’s door and the In-Bed Trunk
from the outside, turn the key and
release it. If you turn it again, all the
doors unlock.
Youcanopenorclosetheside
windows by using the key in the
driver’s door (see page ).
TolockalldoorsandtheIn-Bed
Trunk (the tailgate does not lock),
push the front of the master doorlock
switch on either front door, pressthe
lock tab down on the driver’ sdoor,or
use the key on the outsidelockonthe
driver’ sdoor.
Thisvehiclehasautodoorlocking/
unlockingfeatures.Seepagefor
howtosetthem.
Pushingtherearofeithermaster
doorlockswitchwillunlockallofthe
doorsandtheIn-BedTrunk.
107
84
Lockout Prevention
Power Door Locks
Door Locks
Instruments and Controls
83
MASTER DOOR LOCK SWITCH
LOCK TAB
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your vehicle has customizable
settings for the doors to
automatically lock and unlock. Make
all settings before you start driving.
T
he childproof door lock
s are
designed to prevent children seated
in the rear from accidentally opening
the rear doors. Each rear door has a
lock lever near the edge. With the
lever in the LOCK position, the door
cannot be opened from inside
regardless of the position of the lock
tab. To open the door, pull the lock
tab up, and use the outside door
handle.
Make sure the shift lever is in the
Park (P) position.
Apply the parking brake, and close
the driver’s door.
With the auto door locking and
unlocking, the In-Bed Trunk also
locks and unlocks (the tailgate does
not lock).
T
he auto door lock
ing feature has
three possible settings:
The doors lock whenever you
move the shift lever out of the
Park (P) position.
The doors lock when the vehicle
speed reaches 9 mph (15 km/h).
The auto door locking is
deactivated all the time.
1.
2.
Locks all doors when the shift lever is
moved out of Park (P).
Automatic (Auto) Door Locking/
Unlocking
Childproof Door Locks
Auto Door Locking
To program the Park Lock
mode:
Door Locks
84
LOCK LEVER
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position (do not start the
engine).
3.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Locks all doors when the vehicle’s speed
reaches about 9 mph (15 km/h).
Pushandholdthefrontofthe
master door lock switch on the
driver’ s door. You will hear a
clicking sound, and after about 5
seconds, you will hear another
clicking sound.
Release the switch, and turn the
position within 5 seconds.
Make sure the shi
ft lever is in the
Park (P) position.
(II) position (do not start the
engine).
Push and hol
d the brake pedal,
then move the shift lever out of
Park (P).
Pushandholdthefrontofthe
master door lock switch on the
driver’ s door. You will hear a
clicking sound, and after about 5
seconds, you will hear another
clicking sound.
Release the switch,
and turn the
ignition sw
itch to the
position within 5 seconds.
Apply the parking brake, and close
the driver’s door.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
1.
2.
3.
5.
4.
6.
4.
5.
CONTINUED
Door Locks
Instruments and Controls
85
(I)
ignition switch to the ACCESSORY
ACCESSORY
(I)
7. Move the shift lever to PARK (P).
To program the Drive Lock mode:
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Pushandholdthefrontofthe
master door lock switch on the
driver’s door. You will hear a
clicking sound after about 5
seconds.
Make sure the shift lever is in the
Park (P) position.
Release the switch, and turn the
ignition switch to the
position within 5 seconds.
T
he driver’ s
door and then In-Bed
Trunk unlocks whenever you move
the shift lever to the PARK (P)
position.
All doors and the In-Bed trunk
unlocks whenever you move the
shift lever to the PARK (P) position.
T
he auto door unloc
king feature has
three modes (Park Unlock, Ignition
Switch, and Deactivated), with five
possible settings:
The driver’s door and the In-Bed
Trunk unlocks whenever you turn the
ignition switch to the LOCK (0) position.
All doors and the In-Bed Trunk unlocks
whenever you turn
the ignition switch to
theLOCK (0) position.
The auto door unlocking settings
are deactivated.
Apply the parking brake, and
open
the driver’s door.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position (do not start the
engine).
1.
5.
4.
2.
3.
To turn off the Auto Lock modes:
Auto Door Unlocking
Door Locks
86
(I)
ACCESSORY
Park Unlock mode:
Ignition Switch mode:
Deactivated:
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Make sure the shift lever is in
Park (P), and close the driver’s
door.
Pushandholdtherearofthe
master door lock switch on the
driver’s door. You will hear a
clicking sound. Continue to hold
down the switch:
Release the s
witch, and turn the
ignition switch to the
Make sure the shift lever is in the
Park (P) position.
Turn the ign
ition switch to the ON
(II) position.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position (do not start the engine).
Apply the parking brake, and close
the driver’s door.
1.
2.
4.
3.
1.
2.
3.
Unlocks driver’s door or all doors when
the shift lever is moved to Park (P).
Unlocks driver’ s door or a ll doors when
the ignition switch is out of the ON (II)
position.*
CONTINUED
To program the Park Unlock mode:
Unlock mode:
Door Locks
Instruments and Controls
87
position within 5 seconds.
(I)
ACCESSORY
−
about 5 seco
nds) to
activate the
driver’s door unlock
feature.
(after about 10 seconds) to
activate the all door unlock
feature.
Or, until you hear a third click
−Until you hear a second click
(after
To program the Ignition Switch
Unlock mode:
＊ If equipped
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Apply the parking brake, and
open the driver’s door.
Make sure the shi
ft lever is in the
Park (P) position.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position (do not start the
engine).
Push and hold the brake pedal,
then move the shift lever out of
Park (P).
Pushandholdtherearofthe
master door lock switch on the
driver’s door. You will hear a
clicking sound. Continue to hold
down the switch:
Pushandholdtherearofthe
master door lock switch on the
driver’s door. You will hear a
clicking sound, and after about 5
seconds, you will hear another
clicking sound.
4.
1.
2.
3.
5.
4.
T o turn off the door unlock
modes:
Door Locks
88
−
about 5 seconds) to
activate the
driv
er’s door unlock
feature.
(after abou
t 10 seconds) to
activate the all door unlock
feature.
Release the switch, and turn the
ignition switch to the
position within 5 seconds.
(I)
ACCESSORY
Or, until you hear a third click
−Until you hear a second click
(after
6.
7. Move the shift lever to PARK (P).
Release the switch, and turn the
ignition switch to the
position within 5 seconds.
5.
(I)
ACCESSORY
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
Pressthisbuttononce
tounlockthedriver’ sdoorandthe
In-BedTrunk.Pushittwiceto unlock
theremainingdoors. If you press the
button twice and hold for 3–5 seconds,
the side windows will roll down (see
page 107).
When you press the UNLOCK
button, the front and rear individual
map lights, depending on the interior
light control switch position, will
come on (see page ). If you do
not open any door, the lights stay on
for about 30 seconds, then go out. If
you relock the doors and the In-Bed
Trunk with the remote transmitter
before 30 seconds have elapsed, the
lights will go off immediately.
Press this button once to
lock all doors and the In-Bed Trunk.
Some exterior and interior lights will
flash once.
WhenyoupushLOCKtwicewithin5
seconds,youwillheara hornto
verifythatthedoorsandIn-Bed
Trunkarelockedandthesecurity
system(ifequipped)hasset.This
buttondoesnotworkifanydooris
notfullyclosedorthekeyisinthe
ignitionswitch.
Press and hold this
button for about 1 second to attract
attention; the horn will sound and
the exterior lights will flash for about
30 seconds. To cancel panic mode,
press any other button on the remote
transmitter, or turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position. Panic
mode does not work when the key is
in the ignition switch.
If you do not open any door within 30
seconds, the doors automatically
relock, and the security system sets
(if equipped). The UNLOCK button
does not work when the key is in the
ignition switch.
You can also open all side windows
from outside the vehicle with the
remote transmitter (see page ).
107
118
UNLOCK
LOCK
PANIC
Remote Transmitter
Instruments and Controls
89
LED
UNLOCK
BUTTON
PANIC
BUTTON
LOCK
BUTTON
Some exterior and interior lights will
flash twice each time you push the
button.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Avoid dropping or throwing the
transmitter.
Protect the transmitter from
extreme temperature.
Do not immerse the transmitter in
any liquid.
If you lose a transmitter, the
replacement needs to be
reprogrammed by your dealer.
Remove the screw at the base of
the transmitter with a small
Phillips-head screwdriver.
To replace the battery:
Battery type: CR1616
If it takes several pushes on the
button to lock or unlock the doors,
replace the battery as soon as
possible.
Inside the transmitter, separate
the inner cover from the keypad
by releasing the two tabs on the
cover.
Separate the transmitter by prying
its middle seam with your
fingernail.
1.
2.
3.
Remote Transmitter Care Replacing the Transmitter
Battery
Remote Transmitter
90
SCREW
BATTERY
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＋
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
Remove the old battery from the
back of the inner cover, and insert
a new battery into the back of the
cover with the side facing down.
Install the parts in reverse order.
4.
5.
Remote Transmitter
Instruments and Controls
91
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Youcanopenthetailgatetwo
different ways:
Drop it open by using the upper
handle.
Swingitopenbyusingtheright
lower handle.
To drop open the tailgate, pull up the
upper handle, then pull down the
tailgate. To close the tailgate, push
firmly up until it latches.
Before you open the tailgate a
different way (dropped open, and
then swung open), make sure it is
fully closed.
Make sure all passengers and
objects are clear of the tailgate
before opening and closing it, and
make sure the tailgate is closed
securely before driving.
As a safety feature, the upper handle
is disabled if you do not fully close
the tailgate after it is swung open.
And the lower handle is disabled if
you do not fully close the tailgate
after it is dropped open.
To Drop Open the Tailgate
Dual-Action Tailgate
92
NOTE:
UPPER HANDLE
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To swing open the tailgate, first
make sure it is fully closed, then pull
up the right lower handle, and swing
the tailgate to the left.
To close, swing the tailgate back,
and push it firmly until it is latched.
The dropped open tailgate can be
used as an extended pickup bed.
Make sure to secure the items in the
pickup bed, and do not exceed the
maximum allowable weight on the
tailgate(seepage ).
To turn the bed lights on or off, use
the bed light switch on the
dashboard (see page ).
Before opening or closing the
tailgate, check that passengers,
especially children, are not in the
tailgate’s path.
120
189
CONTINUED
To Swing Open the Tailgate
Dual-Action Tailgate
Instruments and Controls
93
HANDLE
Swinging the tailgate open or
closed while anyone is in its
path can cause serious injury.
Make sure all passengers are
clear of the tailgate’s path
before opening or closing it.
Do not drive with the tailgate swung
open. This could damage the tailgate.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
See page for information on
cargo loading and weight limits.
You can also store and lock items in
the In-Bed Trunk (see page ).
If you do not fasten the seat belt, you
first hear the seat belt reminder
alarm, then the tailgate reminder
beeper sounds.
The indicator does not monitor the
tailgate when it is dropped open.
This indicator is in the door and
tailgate open monitor on the
instrument panel. It comes on when
the tailgate is swung open or it is not
completely closed. This indicator
worksevenifthekeyisnotinthe
ignition switch.
If the tailgate is swung open or not
closed tightly when the ignition
switch is in the ON (II) position, you
will hear six beeps and see the
indicator blinking. The indicator
stays on until you close the tailgate.
The beeper also sounds and the
indicator blinks when you move the
shift lever out of the Park or neutral
position.
Do not allow anyone to hang on the
swung open tailgate. This could
damage the tailgate.
Do not leave the tailgate swung open.
The tailgate may swing and shut
accidentally. This could cause
serious injuries.
Thebedlightscomeonwhenyou
swing open the tailgate. You can also
turn the bed lights on or off by
pushing the bed light switch on the
dashboard (see page ).120
95
186
Loading Cargo
Tailgate Open Indicator
Dual-Action Tailgate
94
Main Menu
Table of Contents
YoucanopentheIn-BedTrunktwo
different ways:
Push the release button on the
lower right side of the In-Bed
Trunk lid when the driver’s door is
unlocked.
To close the In-Bed Trunk, lower the
lid, then press down on the back
edge.
If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected or goes dead, the
release button on the In-Bed Trunk
lid is disabled. To open the In-Bed
Trunk, use the master key.
Usethemasterkeytoopenthe
In-Bed Trunk when the driver’s
door is locked.
Thebedlightscomeonwhenyou
open the In-Bed Trunk. You can also
turn the bed lights on or off by
pushing the bed light switch on the
dashboard (see page ).
You can store items in the In-Bed
Trunk up to 300 lbs (136 kg). Do not
exceed this weight limit, or you may
damage the In-Bed Trunk. See page
for information on loading cargo
and weight limits.
To store items separately in the
In-Bed Trunk, optional divider
guides are available from your dealer.
When the In-Bed Trunk is closed
securely, it can be locked or
unlocked along with the power door
locks (see page ).
83
120
186
CONTINUED
In-Bed Trunk
Instruments and Controls
95
RELEASE
BUTTON
TM
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To avoid damaging the key and key
cylinder of the In-Bed Trunk lid, do
notclosethetailgatewhenthekeyis
in the lid.
As a safety feature, your vehicle has
a release lever on the latch of the
In-Bed Trunk lid so it can be opened
from the inside. To open the In-Bed
Trunk, push the release lever in the
direction of the arrow.
Parents should decide if their
children should be shown how to use
this feature. For more information
about child safety, see page .
To avoid damaging the seal on the
In-Bed Trunk lid, remove any debris
from the lid’s mating surface before
you close it.
To avoid damaging the bottom of the
In-Bed Trunk, do not drive over large
obstacles, and do not use it as a
jacking point to raise the vehicle.
To avoid damaging the In-Bed Trunk
lid, and to prevent items from being
thrown about the vehicle and
possibly hurting someone in an
accident or sudden stop, be sure the
In-Bed Trunk lid is securely closed
before driving away.
This indicator on the instrument
panel reminds you that the In-Bed
Trunk is open (see page ).
69
36
Emergency Opener
In-Bed Trunk Open
Indicator
In-Bed Trunk
96
TM
Main Menu
Table of Contents
There are two cargo hooks for
plastic grocery bags at the back of
the In-Bed Trunk. They are designed
to hold light items. Heavy objects
may damage the hooks.
To protect items in the In-Bed Trunk,
you can disable its release button by
turning off the main switch in the
glove box and locking the glove box
with the master key.
Even if the main switch is in the OFF
position, you can open the In-Bed
Trunk with the master key.
When you are finished washing the
In-Bed Trunk, dry it with a soft cloth,
and reinstall the drain plug.
Youcanwashtheinsideofthe
In-Bed Trunk with a water and mild
detergent solution, and a soft brush
or cloth.
To drain water from the In-Bed
Trunk, remove the drain plug by
turning it counterclockwise.
Cargo HooksWashing the In-Bed TrunkIn-Bed Trunk Main Switch
In-Bed Trunk
Instruments and Controls
97
DRAIN PLUG
CARGO HOOKS
MAIN SWITCH
TM
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
The front passenger’s seat in all
models adjusts manually.
Make all seat adjustments before
you start driving.
To adjust the seat forward or
backward, pull up on the bar under
the seat cushion’s front edge. Move
the seat to the desired position, and
releasethebar.Trytomovetheseat
to make sure it is locked in position.
To change the seat-back angle of the
front seat, pull up the lever on the
outside of the seat bottom.
Once your seat is adjusted correctly,
rock it back and forth to make sure it
is locked in position.
See pages for important safety
information and warnings about how to
properly position the seats and seat-
backs.
On RT, RTX, and Canadian LX models
11 13
Manual Seat Adjustments
Seats
98
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Make sure to pull the lever upward
or downward to its full range.
Make all seat adjustments before
you start driving.
The height of your driver’s seat is
adjustable. To raise the seat,
repeatedly pull up the lever on the
outside of the seat cushion. To lower
the seat, push the lever down
repeatedly.
Vary the lumbar support by moving
the lever on the right side of the
seat-back. Move the lever forward or
backward to adjust the lumbar
support through its full range.
On RTS model
On RT, RTX, and Canadian LX models
Driver’s Seat Manual Height
Adjustment
Driver’s Manual Lumbar Support
Seats
Instruments and Controls
99
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
Moves the seat forward
and backward.
The controls for the power
adjustable driver’s seat are on the
outside edge of the seat bottom. You
can adjust the seat with the ignition
switch in any position. Make all seat
adjustments before you start driving.
Moving the long horizontal switch
adjusts the seat bottom in several
directions. The seat bottom adjusts
in the direction you move the switch.
The short vertical switch adjusts the
seat-back angle.
Moves the whole seat up
and forward, or down
and backward. The front
of the seat also tilts up or
down at the same time.
Moves the front of the
seat up or down.
Raises or lowers the seat.
Adjusts the seat-back
angle forward or
backward.
Increases or decreases
the lumbar support.
(RTL and Canadian EXL
models)
See pages for important safety
information and warnings about how to
properly position the seats and seat-
backs.
11 13
On RTS, RTL, and Canadian EXL
models
Power Seat Adjustments
Seats
100
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Make sure your passenger’s hands
orfingersareawayfromthearmrest
before moving it.
To use the console lid as an armrest,
slide it to the desired position.
The rear seat armrest is in the
center of the rear seats. Pivot it
down to use it.
Armrests
Seats
Instruments and Controls
101
FRONT REAR
Main Menu
Table of Contents
See page for important safety
information and a warning about how to
properly position the head restraints.
13
The head restraints adjust for height.
You need both hands to adjust the
restraint. Do not attempt to adjust it
while driving. To raise it, pull upward.
To lower the restraint, push the
release button sideways, and push
the restraint down.
Your vehicle is equipped with head
restraints in all seating positions to
help protect you and your
passengers from whiplash and other
injuries.
Theyaremosteffectivewhenyou
adjust them so the back of the
occupant’s head rests against the
center of the restraint.
When a passenger is seated in the
rear center seating position, make
sure the center head restraint is
properly positioned.
Head Restraints
Seats
102
RELEASE BUTTON
Rear Center Position
RELEASE BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The left and right rear seat cushions
can be lifted up separately to make
room for cargo.
Remove any items from the seat
beforeyoufolduptheseatcushion.
To fold a rear seat cushion, pull up
the lever on the outside of the
cushion. The seat cushion pops up,
and the seat legs store underneath it.
Push the cushion firmly against the
seat-back to lock it in place.
To return the seat cushion to its
original position, pull the lever
outward, then push down the seat
cushion slowly.
Make sure the seat cushion is locked
securely and the seat legs are
positioned properly in the floor guide.
CONTINUED
Folding the Rear Seats
Seats
Instruments and Controls
103
LEGS
FLOOR GUIDE
Main Menu
Table of Contents
In HI, the heater turns off when the
seat gets warm, and turns back on
after the seat’s temperature drops.
In LO, the heater runs continuously.
It does not cycle with temperature
changes.
Follow these precautions when using
the seat heaters:
Use the HI setting only to heat the
seats quickly, because it draws
large amounts of current from the
battery.
If the engine is left idling for an
extended period, do not use the
seat heaters, even on the LO
setting. It can weaken the battery,
causing hard starting.
Make sure all items in the cargo area
are secured. Loose items can fly
forward and cause injury if you have
to brake hard (See
on page ).
You can also store small items under
the rear seats. Make sure to secure
the items so they will not shift while
you are driving.
Both front seats have seat heaters.
The passenger seat is only heated in
the seat bottom because of the side
airbag cutoff system. The ignition
switch must be in the ON (II)
position to use seat heaters. Push the
top of the switch, HI, to rapidly heat
up the seat. After the seat reaches a
comfortable temperature, select LO
by pushing the bottom of the switch.
This will keep the seat warm.
186
If equipped
Seat Heaters
Carrying Cargo
Seats, Seat Heaters
104
SEAT HEATER SWITCHES
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position to raise or lower any
side window, or open and close the
back window. To open the window,
push the switch down and hold it.
Release the switch when you want
the window to stop. Pull back on the
switchandholdittoclosethe
window.
Thewindowsoperateforupto10
minutes after you turn off the
ignition switch. Opening either front
door cancels this function.
To open or close the
driver’s window, push or pull the
window switch firmly down or up to
the second detent, and release it.
The window will automatically go up
or down all the way. To stop the
window, pull or push the window
switch briefly.
When you push the MAIN switch in,
the passenger windows and the back
window cannot be raised or lowered.
To cancel this feature, push on the
switch again. Keep the MAIN switch
offwhenyouhavechildreninthe
vehicle so they do not injure
themselves by operating the
windows unintentionally.
CONTINUED
AUTO
Power Windows
Instruments and Controls
105
DRIVER’S WINDOW
SWITCH
MAIN SWITCH
BACK WINDOW
SWITCH
Closing a power window on
someone’s hands or fingers can
cause serious injury.
Make sure your passengers are
away from the windows before
closing them.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
− If the driver’s
window senses any obstacle while it
is closing automatically, it will
reverse direction, and then stop. To
close the window, remove the
obstacle, then use the window switch
again.
Auto reverse stops sensing when the
window is almost closed. You should
always check that all passengers and
objects are away from the window
before closing it.
Your vehicle has a power back
window.
This indicator comes on when you
turn the ignition switch from the ON
(II) to the ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK
(0) position without closing the back
window. With the ignition switch in
the ACCESSORY (I) position, the
indicator goes off after about 30
seconds. With the ignition switch in
the LOCK (0) position, the indicator
goes off after about 3 minutes.
If the driver’s window fuse is
removed, the AUTO function may be
disabled. The power window system
needs to be reset after reinstalling
the fuse.
Start the engine. Push down and
hold the driver’s window switch
until the window is fully open.
Pull and hold the driver’s window
switch to close the window
completely, then hold the switch
for about 2 seconds.
If the power windows do not operate
properly after resetting, have your
vehicle checked by your dealer.
1.
2.
AUTO REVERSE Back Window
Back Window Open
Indicator
Power Windows
106
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To open:
Insert the key in the driver’s door
lock.
Turn the key clockwise, then
release it.
You can open all of the side windows
from the outside with the remote
transmitter.
Press the UNLOCK button once
to unlock the driver’s door.
Press the UNLOCK button a
second time, and hold it. The
passenger’s doors unlock, and all
four side windows start to open.
To stop the windows, release the
button.
You can open and close the side
windows with the key in the driver’s
door lock.
The back window is not designed to
carry long items through it. Do not
use the opened back window as a
cargo area pass-through.
If you remove the ignition key and
open the driver’s door without
closing the back window, you hear
five beeps and see the indicator blink.
If you do not close the back window
before the beeper stops, the
indicator stops blinking but remains
on. It will go off after about 3
minutes (see page ).
To open the windows further,
press the button again, within
about 3 seconds.
You cannot close the windows with
the remote transmitter.
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
69
CONTINUED
Opening the Side Windows with
the Remote Transmitter
Opening/Closing the Side
Windows with the Key
Power Windows
Instruments and Controls
107
Open
Close
UNLOCK BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Turnthekeyclockwiseagain,and
hold it. All four side windows start
to open. To stop the windows,
release the key.
To open the windows further, turn
andholdthekeyagain(within
10 seconds).
The moonroof has two positions: it
can be tilted up in the back for
ventilation, or it can slide back into
the roof. Use the switch near the left
dashboard vent to operate the
moonroof. The ignition switch must
be in the ON (II) position.
NOTE: If the windows stop before
the desired position, repeat steps 2
and 3.
To close the windows further, turn
andholdthekeyagain(within
10 seconds).
To close:
NOTE: If the windows stop before
the desired position, repeat steps 2
and 3.
Insert the key in the driver’s door
lock.
Turn the key counterclockwise,
then release it.
Turn the key counterclockwise
again, and hold it. All four side
windowsstarttoclose.Tostopthe
windows, release the key.
1.
2.
3.
4.3.
4.
If equipped
Moonroof
Power Windows, Moonroof
108
MOONROOF SWITCH
Main Menu
Table of Contents
You can open and close the
moonroof for up to 10 minutes after
you turn off the ignition switch.
Opening either front door cancels
this function.
To apply the parking brake, push the
pedal down with your foot. To
release it, pull the release handle
fully. The parking brake indicator on
the instrument panel should go out
when the parking brake is fully
released, and the ignition switch is in
the ON (II) position (see page ).
To tilt up the back of the moonroof,
press and hold the center part of the
switch ( ). To close the
moonroof, press and hold the upper
part of the switch ( ). To open
the moonroof, press and hold the
lower part of the switch ( ).
Release the switch when the
moonroof gets to the desired
position.
Make sure everyone’s hands are
away from the moonroof before
opening or closing it.
63
CONTINUED
Parking Brake
Moonroof, Parking Brake
Instruments and Controls
109
PARKING BRAKE PEDAL
RELEASE
HANDLE
Opening or closing the
moonroof on someone’s hands
or fingers can cause serious
injury.
Make sure all hands and fingers
are clear of the moonroof
before opening or closing it.
If you try to open the moonroof in
below-freezing temperatures, or when
it is covered with snow or ice, you can
damage the moonroof panel or its
motor.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Keeptheinsideandoutsidemirrors
clean and adjusted for best visibility.
Be sure to adjust the mirrors before
you start driving.
The inside mirror has day and night
positions. The night position reduces
glare from headlights behind you.
Flip the tab on the bottom edge of
the mirror to select the day or night
position.
Therearviewmirrorhasacompass
function to indicate the vehicle’s
direction.
Refer to on page .
168
If equipped
Mirrors
Compass
Parking Brake, Mirrors
110
TAB
Driving the vehicle with the parking
brake applied can damage the rear
brakes and axles. A beeper will sound
if the vehicle is driven with the parking
brake on.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position.
When you finish, move the
selector switch to the center (off)
position. This turns the
adjustment switch off to keep your
settings.
The outside mirrors are heated to
remove fog and frost. With the
ignition switch in the ON (II)
position, turn on the heaters by
pressing the button. The indicator in
the button comes on as a reminder.
Press the button again to turn the
heaters off.
Push the appropriate edge of the
adjustment switch to move the
mirrorright,left,up,ordown.
Move the selector switch to L
(driver’s side) or R (passenger’s
side).
1.
2.
3.
4.
If equipped
Adjusting the Power Mirrors Heated Mirrors
Mirrors
Instruments and Controls
111
HEATED MIRROR BUTTON
SELECTOR SWITCH
ADJUSTMENT SWITCH
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＊
＊
Interior Convenience Items
112
GLOVE BOX
VANITY MIRROR SUN VISOR CENTER CONSOLE
BEVERAGE HOLDER
CONSOLE COMPARTMENT
COAT HOOK
ACCESSORY POWER
SOCKET
SUNGLASSES
HOLDER
CENTER UPPER
POCKET
CENTER POCKET
CENTER LOWER POCKET BEVERAGE HOLDERS
ACCESSORY
POWER
SOCKETS
: On vehicle without navigation system
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your vehicle has a multi-function
center console. It includes beverage
holders, storage compartments, an
armrest, a coin holder, and a storage
tray.
The center console main
compartment is under the tray and
the beverage holder. You can access
the main compartment in two ways
(front or rear).
To open the front of the
compartment, squeeze the knob, and
push it forward while sliding the
beverage holder. To close, squeeze
the knob and pull the compartment
backward until the beverage holder
latches.
To open the rear of the compartment,
push the button at the end of the
tray, then slide the tray forward. To
close, slide the tray back in place.
The console compartment light
comesonwhentheinstrumentpanel
lights are on.
There are two removable partitions
in the main compartment. The
partitions can be used to divide the
main compartment, or can be stored
at the front of the compartment.
Center Console
Console Compartments
Interior Convenience Items
Instruments and Controls
113
Main Menu
Table of Contents
You can put small items in the upper
console compartment. To use it, pull
up on the lever and lift up the
armrest.
The upper console compartment has
a removable coin holder. Pull the
coin holder straight up to remove it.
To install it, push it down along the
guides on the side of the
compartment.
Spilled liquids can damage the
upholstery, carpeting, and electrical
components in the interior.
There are two cargo hooks for
plastic grocery bags at the back of
the center console. They are
designed to hold light items. Heavy
objects may damage the hooks.
Be careful when you are using the
beverage holders. A spilled liquid
that is very hot can scald you or your
passengers. Liquid can also spill
from the door panel beverage
holders when you close the doors.
Use only resealable containers in the
door beverage holders.
The center console has two beverage
holders on the front. Your vehicle
also has beverage holders in the rear
seat armrest and the rear door
panels.
If equipped
Beverage Holders
Cargo Hooks
Interior Convenience Items
114
COIN HOLDER
CARGO HOOKS
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Open the glove box by pulling the
handle. Close it with a firm push.
Lock or unlock the glove box with
the master key.
The glove box light comes on when
the parking lights are on.
Some larger styles of sunglasses
may not fit in the holder.
These hooks are not designed for
large or heavy items.
To open the sunglasses holder, push
on the rear edge. Make sure the
holder is closed while you are driving.
Glove Box Sunglasses HolderCoat Hooks
Interior Convenience Items
Instruments and Controls
115
SUNGLASSES HOLDER
An open glove box can cause
serious injury to your passenger
inacrash,evenifthe
passenger is wearing the seat
belt.
Always keep the glove box
closed while driving.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
There are three accessory power
sockets in your vehicle. Two
accessory power sockets are above
the center pocket on the dashboard,
and another is on the back of the
center console.
These sockets are intended to supply
power for 12 volt DC accessories
that are rated 120 watts or less (10
amps).
To use an accessory power socket,
the ignition switch must be in the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
None of the sockets will power an
automotive type cigarette lighter
element. When both sockets are
being used, the combined power
rating of the accessories should be
120 watts or less (10 amps).
Accessory Power Sockets
Interior Convenience Items
116
FRONT REAR
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Pull up the vanity mirror cover to use
it.
The light comes on when you pull up
the cover.
The light will not come on if the sun
visor is slid outward.
Make sure you put the sun visor
back in place when you are getting
into or out of the vehicle.
In this position, the sun visor can be
adjusted by moving it on its slider.
Do not use the extended sun visor
over the inside mirror.
To use the sun visor, pull it down.
Whenusingthesunvisorforthe
side window, remove the support rod
from the clip, and swing it out.
Sun Visor Vanity Mirror
Interior Convenience Items
Instruments and Controls
117
SUN VISOR
Main Menu
Table of Contents
When the interior light control switch is
in the ON position:
When the switch is in the OFF position:When the switch is in the door position:
None of the lights come on when a
door is opened.
The map lights in the front can be
turned on and off by pushing each
lens. The rear map lights cannot
be used.
All the individual map lights and
the rear console light come on and
stay on as long as the switch
remains in the ON position.
The individual map lights and the
rear console light come on when
any door is opened, or when the
remote transmitter or the key is
used to unlock the doors. When
the doors are closed, each
individual map light can be turned
on and off by pushing the lens.
The lights fade out about 30
seconds after all the doors are
closed.
With any door left open and the
key is removed from the ignition
switch, the lights stay on about 3
minutes, then go out.
Interior Light Control Switch
Interior Lights
118
ON
OFF
DOOR POSITION
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Turn on a front individual map light
by pushing the lens. Push the lens
again to turn it off. With the interior
light control switch in the door
position, a rear map light can be
turned on by pushing the lens. Push
the lens again to turn it off.
The courtesy light in each door
comes on when you open that door.
The light around the ignition switch
only comes on when you open the
driver’s door. After you close the
door, the ignition switch light fades
out in about 30 seconds.
The courtesy light in the back of the
center console comes on when you
open any door with the interior light
control switch in the door position.
After you close the doors, the light
fades out.
The map lights stay on when the
interior light control switch is in the
door position and the map light
switch is on.
The courtesy light between the front
map lights comes on when you turn
the parking lights on. To adjust its
brightness, turn the instrument
panel brightness control dial on the
dashboard (see page ).78
If equipped
Individual Map Lights Individual Interior Lights Courtesy Light
Interior Lights
Instruments and Controls
119
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you turn the ignition switch to
ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0)
without turning off the bed lights,
the lights and the indicator will
remain on, then go off after 20
minutes (see page ).
Your vehicle has bed lights in the
pickup bed: a light on each front
upper and rear bottom side. With the
shift lever in the Park position, the
bed lights come on when you push
the bed light switch on the
dashboard, swing open the tailgate,
or open the In-Bed Trunk. The
indicator on the instrument panel
alsocomesontoremindyouthatthe
bed lights are on.
To turn off the lights, push the light
switch again, or close the tailgate
and the In-Bed Trunk.
When you move the shift lever out of
the Park position, the bed lights go
off and cannot be used.
69
Bed Lights
120
BED LIGHT SWITCH
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The standard audio system has
many features. This section
describes those features and how to
use them. (If you have an optional
audio system, refer to the operating
instructions that came with it.)
The heating and air conditioning
system in your vehicle provides a
comfortable driving environment in
all weather conditions.
Your vehicle has an anti-theft audio
system that requires a code number
to enable it.
The security system helps to
discourage vandalism and theft of
your vehicle.
.............Vents, Heating, and A/C . 122
Using the Heater ....................... 126
Using Automatic Climate
...................................Control . 128
........................Rear Ventilation . 129
..........Dual Temperature Control . 130
..............Climate Control Sensors . 132
..........Playing the AM/FM Radio . 133
............AM/FM Radio Reception . 140
.Playing the XM
Satellite Radio . 142
..........Playing a CD, CD Changer . 148
....................Protecting Your CDs . 159
CD Player/Changer Error
...................................Messages . 160
................Remote Audio Controls . 161
...Playing an Optional Audio Unit . 161
.................Radio Theft Protection . 162
..........................Setting the Clock . 163
............................Security System . 164
...............................Cruise Control . 165
.........................................Compass . 168
HomeLink Universal
................................Transceiver . 171
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS)-Required
.............Federal Explanation . 175
On all models except RT, RTX, and
Canadian LX
Features
Features
121
...........................Using the A/C . 126
Main Menu
Vents, Heating, and A/C
122
FAN CONTROL DIAL
MODE BUTTONS
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL DIAL
RECIRCULATION
BUTTON
WINDSHIELD DEFROST
BUTTON
PASSENGER’S SIDE
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL DIAL
DRIVER’S SIDE
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL DIAL
OFF BUTTON
WINDSHIELD DEFROST BUTTON
DUAL BUTTON
AIR CONDITIONING
BUTTON
MAX A/C BUTTON
MODE BUTTONS
AIR CONDITIONING
BUTTON
AUTO BUTTON
DRIVER’S SIDE
TEMPERATURE
DISPLAY
RECIRCULATION BUTTON
PASSENGER’S SIDE
TEMPERATURE DISPLAY
MODE
BUTTON
FAN CONTROL BUTTONS
RTS, RTL, and
Canadian EXL models
RT,RTX,and
Canadian LX models
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Turn the dial clockwise to increase
the fan speed and airflow. Turn the
dial counterclockwise to decrease it.
Turning this dial clockwise increases
the temperature of the airflow.
On RTS, RTL, and Canadian EXL
models, see pages and for
information on automatic climate
control and semi-automatic operation.
Select the fan speed by pressing the
fan control buttons ( or ).
The fan speed is shown in vertical
bars on the display.
When the indicator in the DUAL
button is off, both sides adjust to the
driver’s side temperature.
Push the DUAL button. When the
indicator in the button is on, turn the
dials to adjust the temperature.
The driver and passenger can select
independent temperature settings.
You can set the temperatures for the
driver’s side and the passenger’s side
separately when this button is
pressed (indicator on). When the
indicator in the DUAL button is off,
you can adjust both sides to the
same temperature with the driver’s
side temperature control dial.
Press the DUAL button to select
dual temperature control mode (see
page ).
130
128 129
CONTINUED
On RTS, RTL, and Canadian EXL
models
On RT, RTX, and Canadian LX models
On RTS, RTL, and Canadian EXL
models
On RTS, RTL, and Canadian EXL
models
On RT, RTX, and Canadian LX models
Vents, Heating, and A/C
Fan Control
Temperature Control Dual Button
Features
123
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The outside air intakes for the
heating and cooling system are at
the base of the windshield. Keep this
area clear of leaves and other debris.
Thesystemshouldbeleftinfresh
air mode under almost all conditions.
Keeping the system in recirculation
mode, particularly with the A/C off,
can cause the windows to fog up.
Switch to recirculation mode when
driving through dusty or smoky
conditions, then return to fresh air
mode.
Use the mode control buttons to
select the vents air flows from. Some
air will flow from the dashboard
corner vents in all modes.
When the recirculation indicator is
on, air from the vehicle’s interior is
sent throughout the system again.
When the indicator is off, air is
brought in from the outside of the
vehicle (fresh air mode).
Press the A/C button to turn the air
conditioningonandoff.Youwillsee
A/C ON or A/C OFF in the display.
When you turn the A/C off, the
system cannot regulate the inside
temperature if you set the
temperature control below the
outside temperature.
Each time you press the MODE
button (On RTS, RTL, and Canadian
EXL models) or either mode button
(On RT, RTX, and Canadian LX
models), the display shows the mode
selected.
Air flows from the floor
vents.
Airflow is divided between
the vents in the dashboard, rear and
the floor vents.
Air flows from the center,
corner, and rear vents in the
dashboard.
Recirculation Button Mode ControlAir Conditioning (A/C) Button
Vents, Heating, and A/C
124
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Airflow is divided between
the floor vents and the defroster
vents at the base of the windshield.
The flow-through ventilation system
draws in outside air, circulates it
through the interior, then exhausts it
through vents near the back window.Press the button, Air flows
from the defroster vents at the base
of the windshield.
When you select or ,
the system automatically switches to
fresh air mode and turns on the A/C.
Set the temperature to the lower
limit.
Make sure the A/C is off.
Select and fresh air mode.
Set the fan to the desired speed.
The system automatically
turns on the A/C and switches to
recirculation mode. Air flows from
the center, side, and rear vents in the
dashboard. Pressing the or
A/C button cancels MAX A/C.
When you select , the system
automatically switches to fresh air
mode and turns on the A/C.
When you select , the system
automatically switches to fresh air
mode.
1.
2.
3.
4.
On RTS, RTL, and Canadian EXL
models
On RT, RTX, and Canadian LX models
On RT, RTX, and Canadian LX models
Vents, Heating, and A/C
MAX A/C Button Ventilation
Features
125
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The heater uses engine coolant to
warm the air. If the engine is cold, it
will be several minutes before you
feel warm air coming from the
system.
Air conditioning places an extra load
on the engine. Watch the engine
coolant temperature gauge (see page
). If it moves near the red zone,
turn off the A/C until the gauge
reading returns to normal.
Turn on the A/C by pressing the
button. The display shows A/C
ON on when a fan speed is
selected.
Make sure the temperature is set
to maximum cool.
Select .
If the outside air is humid, select
recirculation mode. If the outside
air is dry, select fresh air mode.
Set the fan to the desired speed.
you can
cool it down more rapidly by partially
opening the windows, turning on the
A/C, and setting the fan to
maximum speed in fresh air mode.
To cool the interior with MAX A/C:Select .
When you select , the system
automatically switches to the fresh
air mode.
Set the fan to the desired speed.
Adjust the warmth of the air with
the temperature control dial.
Set the fan to the desired speed.
Select MAX A/C mode.
The system automatically turns on
the A/C, selects , and
switches to recirculation mode.
Make sure the temperature is set
to maximum cool.
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
72
If the interior is very warm,
On RT, RTX, and Canadian LX models
Using the Heater Using the A/C
Vents, Heating, and A/C
126
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Air conditioning, as it cools, removes
moisture from the air. When used in
combination with the heater, it
makes the interior warm and dry.
This setting is suitable for all driving
conditions whenever the outside
temperature is above 32°F (0°C).
To remove fog from the inside of the
windows:
Turn the fan on.
Press the A/C button.
Select and fresh air mode.
Adjust the temperature to your
preference.
When you switch to another mode
from , the A/C stays on.
Press the A/C button to turn it off.
Set the fan to the desired speed or
high for faster defrosting.
Select . When you select
, the system automatically
switches to fresh air mode and
turns on the A/C. The A/C
indicator will not be displayed if it
was off to start with.
Adjust the temperature so the
airflow feels warm.
To increase airflow to the
windshield, close the side vents.
Your vehicle has heating wires at the
bottom of the windshield to help
heat the wiper blades and the
windshield. If the outside
temperature is near freezing, the
heater turns on automatically when
you turn the ignition switch to the
ON (II) position. The heater turns
off automatically when the outside
temperature is above freezing.
This function helps to increase wiper
performance when the wiper arms
sit in the parked position in snowy or
icy conditions.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Dehumidify the Interior To Defog and Defrost Automatic Heated Wiper Zone
Vents, Heating, and A/C
Features
127
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
Select . The system
automatically switches to fresh air
mode and turns on the A/C. The
A/C indicator does not come on if
it was off to start with.
Select .
Set the fan and temperature
controls to maximum level.
To clear the windows faster, you can
close the dashboard corner vents by
rotating the wheel next to
(passenger’s side) or below it
(driver’s side). This will send more
warm air to the windshield defroster
vents. Once the windshield is clear,
select fresh air mode to avoid
fogging the windows.
The system automatically selects the
proper mix of conditioned and/or
heated air that will, as quickly as
possible, raise or lower the interior
temperature to your preference.
When you set the temperature to its
lower limit ( ) or its upper limit
( ), the system runs at full
cooling or heating only. It does not
regulate the interior temperature.
In cold weather, the fan will not
come on automatically until the
heater starts to develop warm air.
When
the indicator in the DUAL button is
on, the driver’s side and passenger’s
side temperature can be controlled
independently (see page ).
For your safety, make sure you have
a clear view through all the windows
before driving.
Set the desired temperature by
turning the temperature control
dial. You will see AUTO in the
system’s display.
Press the AUTO button.
The automatic climate control
system adjusts the fan speed and
airflow levels to maintain the interior
temperature you select.
1.
2.
3.
130
Dual Temperature Control
On RTS, RTL, and Canadian EXL
models
Vents, Heating, and A/C
To Remove Exterior Frost or Ice
From the Windows
Using Automatic Climate Control
128
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
Turning the fan speed control dial all
the way to the left shuts the system
off.
You can adjust the direction of the
air coming from the rear vents in the
back of the center console by
moving the tab in the center of each
vent up-and-down and side-to-side.
You can also adjust the amount of
airflow by turning the dial between
the vents.
Making any manual selection causes
thewordAUTOinthedisplaytogo
out.
You can manually select various
functions of the climate control
system when it is in full automatic
mode. All other features remain
automatically controlled.
To keep stale air and mustiness
from collecting, you should have
the fan running at all times.
Keep the system off for short
periods only.
IfyoupressOFF,theclimatecontrol
system shuts off.
On RTS, RTL, and Canadian EXL
models
On RTS, RTL, and Canadian EXL
models
On RT, RTX, and Canadian LX models
Vents, Heating, and A/C
Semi-automatic Operation To Turn Everything Off Rear Ventilation
Features
129
DIAL
TAB
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The driver’s side and passenger’s
side can be controlled independently
by adjusting these dials when the
green indicator in the DUAL button
is on.
Your vehicle has two temperature
control dials, one for the driver, and
one for the front passenger.
Push AUTO or to turn on the
system. The selected temperatures
appear in the display. When the
indicator in the DUAL button is off,
you can adjust both sides to the
same temperature by adjusting the
driver’s side temperature control dial.
On RTS, RTL, and Canadian EXL
models
Dual Temperature Control
Temperature Control Dials
130
DUAL BUTTON
PASSENGER’S SIDE
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL DIAL
DRIVER’S SIDE
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL DIAL
DRIVER’S SIDE
TEMPERATURE
DISPLAY
PASSENGER’S SIDE
TEMPERATURE DISPLAY
U.S. model is shown
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To set the driver’s side temperature
differently than the passenger’s,
press the DUAL button, then turn
the driver’s control dial. To set the
passenger’s side differently than the
driver’s, turn the passenger’s control
dial. You can adjust the passenger’s
side without pressing the DUAL
button first.
When you set the temperature to its
lower or upper limit, it is displayed as
or .
Dual Temperature Control
Features
131
PASSENGER’S SIDEDRIVER’S SIDE
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Theclimatecontrolsystemhastwo
sensors. A sunlight sensor is in the
top of the dashboard, and a
temperature sensor is under the
steering column. Do not cover the
sensors or spill any liquid on them.
On RTS, RTL, and Canadian EXL
models
Climate Control Sensors
Sunlight and Temperature
Sensors
132
SUNLIGHT SENSOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
Playing the AM/FM Radio
Features
133
AM/FM
BUTTON
AUTO SELECT BUTTON
SOUND BUTTON
POWER BUTTON
STEREO INDICATOR
VOLUME
KNOB
TUNE BAR
PRESET BARS
SCAN
BUTTON
SOUND BUTTON
STEREO INDICATOR
AM/FM
BUTTON
TUNE BAR
PRESET BARS
SCAN
BUTTON
POWER BUTTON
VOLUME
KNOB
SEEK/SKIP BAR
SEEK/SKIP BAR
AUTO SELECT
BUTTON
U.S. RTS model
U.S. RT and RTX models
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Playing the AM/FM Radio
134
AUTO SELECT BUTTON
SOUND BUTTON
POWER BUTTON
STEREO INDICATOR
VOLUME
KNOB
PRESET BARS
SCAN
BUTTON
SOUND BUTTON
STEREO INDICATOR
TUNE BAR
PRESET BARS
SCAN
BUTTON
POWER BUTTON
VOLUME
KNOB
SEEK/SKIP BAR
SEEK/SKIP BAR
FM BUTTON
AM BUTTON
FM
BUTTON
AM
BUTTON
TUNE BAR
AUTO SELECT
BUTTON
Canadian LX model
Canadian EXL model without navigation system
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Playing the AM/FM Radio
Features
135
AM/FM
BUTTON
SOUND BUTTON
POWER BUTTON
STEREO INDICATOR
VOLUME
KNOB
TUNE BARPRESET BARS
SCAN
BUTTON
SOUND BUTTON
STEREO INDICATOR
TUNE BAR
PRESET BARS
SEEK/SKIP BAR
AUTO SELECT
BUTTON
AM/FM BUTTON
SCAN BUTTON
SOUND BUTTON
STEREO INDICATOR
TUNE BARPRESET BARS
POWER BUTTON
SEEK/SKIP BAR
SCAN BUTTON
POWER BUTTON
VOLUME KNOB
VOLUME KNOB
FM BUTTON
AM BUTTON
SEEK/SKIP BAR
AUTO SELECT BUTTON
AUTO SELECT
BUTTON
U.S. RTL model without navigation system
U.S. RTL model with navigation system
Canadian EXL model with navigation system
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−−
−
−
The ignition switch must be in the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
Turn the system on by pushing the
PWR button or the AM/FM button
(AMorFMbuttononCanadian
models). Adjust the volume by
turning the volume knob.
You can use any of five methods to
find radio stations on the selected
band: TUNE, SEEK, SCAN, the
preset bars, and AUTO SELECT.
Pushing the AUDIO button will also
turn on the system (see page ).
The band and frequency that the
radio was last tuned to is displayed.
To change bands, press the AM/FM
button (AM or FM button). On the
FM band, ST will be displayed if the
stationisbroadcastinginstereo.
Stereo reproduction in AM is not
available.
Use the TUNE bar to tune
the radio to a desired frequency.
Press the side of the bar to tune
to a higher frequency, and press the
side to tune to a lower
frequency.
The SEEK function
searches up and down from the
current frequency to find a station
with a strong signal. To activate it,
press the or side of the
bar, then release it.
The scan function samples
all stations with strong signals on the
selected band. To activate it, press
the SCAN button, then release it.
You will see SCAN in the display.
The system will scan for a station
with a strong signal. When it finds
one, it will stop and play that station
for about 10 seconds.
If you do nothing, the system will
scan for the next strong station and
play it for 10 seconds. When it plays
a station that you want to listen to,
press the SCAN button again.
Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store a
total of six stations on AM and
twelve stations on FM.
Pick a preset number (1 6), and
hold it until you hear a beep.
Usethetune,seek,orscan
function to tune the radio to a
desired station.
Select the desired band, AM or
FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store
twelve stations.
Each side of the bars
(1 6) can store one station on AM,
and two stations on FM.
1.
2.
3.
4.
138
On vehicles with navigation system
To Play the AM/FM Radio To Select a Station
TUNE
SEEK
SCAN
PRESET
Playing the AM/FM Radio
136
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
−
−
If you do not like the stations auto
select has stored, you can store
other frequencies on the preset bars
as previously described.
,pressthe
A. SEL button. This restores the
presets you originally set.
Press the SOUND button repeatedly
to display the SUBWOOFER (if
equipped), BASS, TREBLE, FADER,
and BALANCE settings.
If you are
traveling far from home and can no
longer receive your preset stations,
you can use the auto select feature to
find stations in the local area.
Press the A. SEL button. ‘‘A.SEL’’
flashes in the display, and the system
goes into scan mode for several
seconds. It stores the frequencies of
six AM, and twelve FM stations in
the preset bars.
You will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed after
pressing a preset bar if auto select
cannot find a strong station for every
preset bar.
Eachmodeisshowninthedisplayas
it changes. Turn the VOLUME knob
to adjust the setting to your liking.
When the level reaches the center,
youwillsee‘‘ ’’inthedisplay.
The system will automatically return
the display to the selected audio
mode about 5 seconds after you stop
adjusting a mode.
Adjusts the
strength of sound from the
subwoofer speaker.
Adjusts the bass.
Adjusts the treble.
Adjusts the front-to-back
strength of the sound.
Adjusts the side-to-
side strength of the sound.
To turn off auto select
If equipped
Playing the AM/FM Radio
Adjusting the Sound
AUTO SELECT
SUBWOOFER
BASS
TREBLE
FADER
BALANCE
Features
137
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
In addition to the knobs, buttons, and
bars on the radio control panel, you
can operate some of the radio
controls on the navigation system
screen.
To adjust the sound, push the
AUDIO button, then enter the sound
grid by touching the SOUND icon on
the display.
While you are listening to the radio,
you can change to another band by
pressing the AUDIO button next to
the navigation system screen, and
then touching the desired band icon
(FM1, FM2, or AM).
AUTO SELECT, SCAN, and SOUND
are adjustable from the navigation
screen. For an explanation of these
functions, see pages and .
Touch the
A.SEL icon to activate the auto select
function. You will see A.SEL flashing
on the display.
Touch the SCAN icon to
activate the scan function. You will
see SCAN in the display. Touch the
icon again to deactivate it.
136 137
On vehicles with navigation system
Operating the Radio on the
Navigation System Screen
AUTO SELECT
SCAN
Adjusting the Sound
Playing the AM/FM Radio
138
AUDIO BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−＋
To adjust the treble
and bass, touch or on each
side of the treble or bass adjustment
bar. The adjustment bar shows you
the current setting.
You can use the instrument panel
brightness control dial to adjust the
illumination of the audio system (see
page ). The audio system
illuminates when the parking lights
are on, even if the radio is off.
These modes adjust
the strength of the sound coming
from each speaker. Left/Right
balance adjusts the side-to-side
strength, while Front/Rear fader
adjusts the front-to-back strength.
To adjust the left/right balance,
touch the ‘‘L’’ or ‘‘R’’ icon. To adjust
the front/rear fader, touch the ‘‘FR’’
or ‘‘RR’’ icon.
To see the audio display when you
are finished adjusting the sound,
wait 5 seconds.
78
Audio System Lighting
Treble/Bass
Left/Right Balance and Front/
Rear Fader
Playing the AM/FM Radio
Features
139
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The radio can receive the complete
AM and FM bands.
Those bands cover these frequen-
cies:
AM band: 530 to 1,710 kHz
FM band: 87.7 to 107.9 MHz
Radio stations on the AM band are
assigned frequencies at least 10 kHz
apart (530, 540, 550). Stations on the
FM band are assigned frequencies at
least 0.2 MHz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3). Driving very near the transmitter of
a station that is broadcasting on a
frequency close to the frequency of
the station you are listening to can
also affect your radio’s reception.
You may temporarily hear both
stations,orhearonlythestationyou
are close to.
How well the radio receives stations
is dependent on many factors, such
as the distance from the station’s
transmitter, nearby large objects,
atmospheric conditions, and even
items stored on the roof rack.
A radio station’s signal gets weaker
as you get farther away from its
transmitter. If you are listening to an
AM station, you will notice the sound
volume becoming weaker, and the
stationdriftinginandout.Ifyouare
listening to an FM station, you will
see the stereo indicator flickering off
and on as the signal weakens.
Eventually, the stereo indicator will
go off and the sound will fade
completely as you get out of range of
the station’s signal.
Stations must use these exact
frequencies. It is fairly common for
stations to round-off the frequency in
their advertising, so your radio could
display a frequency of 100.9 even
though the announcer may identify
the station as ‘‘FM101.’’
Radio Frequencies Radio Reception
AM/FM Radio Reception
140
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Radio signals, especially on the FM
band, are deflected by large objects
such as buildings and hills. Your
radio then receives both the direct
signal from the station’s transmitter,
and the deflected signal. This causes
the sound to distort or flutter. This is
a main cause of poor radio reception
in city driving.
Radio reception can be affected by
atmospheric conditions such as
thunderstorms, high humidity, and
even sunspots. You may be able to
receive a distant radio station one
day and not receive it the next day
because of a change in conditions.
Electrical interference from passing
vehicles and stationary sources can
cause temporary reception problems.
As required by the FCC:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
AM/FM Radio Reception
Features
141
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Playing the XM Satellite Radio
142
POWER BUTTON
TUNE BAR
VOLUME
KNOB
DISPLAY/MODE BUTTON
PRESET BARS
SCAN BUTTON
CATEGORY BAR
POWER BUTTON
VOLUME
KNOB
CATEGORY BAR
DISPLAY/MODE BUTTON
PRESET BARS
TUNE BAR
SCAN
BUTTON
XM RADIO BUTTON
XM RADIO BUTTON
U.S. RTL model without navigation system
U.S. RTL model with navigation system
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
On the audio display, you will see the
selected CHANNEL (number),
CATEGORY, NAME (artist name),
and TITLE (music title).
Your audio system is capable of
receiving XM
Satellite Radio
anywhere in the United States,
except Hawaii and Alaska.
You may experience periods when
XM Radio does not transmit the
artist’s name and song title
information. If this happens, there is
nothing wrong with your system.
XM
is a registered trademark of
XM Satellite Radio, Inc.
XM radio receives signals from two
satellites to produce clear, high-
quality digital reception. It offers
many channels in several categories.
Along with a large selection of
different types of music, XM radio
allows you to view channel and
category selections in the display.
The navigation system screen also
shows all XM information when the
AUDIO button is pressed.
To listen to XM radio, turn the
ignition switch to the ACCESSORY
(I) or ON (II) position. Push the
PWR button to turn on the audio
system, and press the ‘‘XM’’ button.
Adjust the volume by turning the
volume knob. The last channel you
listened to will show in the display.
You can also change to the XM radio
while you are listening to an FM
station, AM station, CD, etc., by
touching the XM1 or XM2 icon on
the audio display (navigation system
screen).
To switch between
channel mode and category mode,
press and hold the DISP/MODE
button until the mode changes.
In channel mode, you can select all
of the available channels. In category
mode, such as Jazz, Rock, Classical,
etc., you can select all of the
channels within that category.
Each time you press and release the
DISP/MODE button, the display
changes in the following sequence:
Channel name, channel number,
category, artist name, and music title.
CONTINUED
U.S. RTL model only
Playing the XM Satellite Radio
Operating the XM Radio
MODE
Features
143
On vehicles with navigation system
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−Press the TUNE bar to
change channel selections. Press
for higher numbered channels
and for lower numbered
channels. In the category mode, you
can only select channels within that
category.
Press either side of the CATEGORY
bar ( or ) to select another
category.
The scan function gives
you a sampling of all channels while
in the channel mode. In the category
mode, only the channels within that
category are scanned. To activate
scan, press the SCAN button or
touch the SCAN icon on the screen.
The system plays each channel in
numerical order for a few seconds,
then selects the next channel. When
you hear a channel you want to listen
to, press the button or touch the icon
again.
Youcanstoreupto12
preset channels using each side of
the preset bar or preset icons on the
screen. Each side of the bar stores
one channel from the XM1 band and
one channel from the XM2 band.
Pick a preset number (icon) you
want for that channel. Press and
hold the bar (icon) until you hear a
beep.
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to store the
first six channels.
Once a channel is stored, press and
release the proper side of the preset
bar (icon) to tune to it.
To store a channel:
Press the XM button. Either XM1
or XM2 will show in the display.
Usethetune,seek,orscan
function to tune to a desired
channel.
Press the XM button again or
touch the other XM icon (XM1 or
XM2) on the audio display. Store
the next six channels using steps 2
and 3.
In category mode, only channels
within that category can be selected.
In channel mode, all channels can be
selected.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Playing the XM Satellite Radio
TUNE
SEEK/SKIP (CATEGORY)
SCAN
Preset
144
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
−
−
CONTINUED
The encryption
code is being
updated. Wait
until the
encryption code is
fully updated.
Channels 0 and 1
should still work
normally.
The signal is
currently too
weak. Move the
vehicle to an area
away from tall
buildings, and
with an
unobstructed view
of the southern
horizon.
The selected channel
number does not exist or
isnotpartofyour
subscription, or this
channel has no artist or
title information at this
time.
The channel
currently selected is
no longer
broadcasting.
XM is loading the
audio or program
information.
There is a problem
with the XM
antenna. Please
consult your dealer.
Playing the XM Satellite Radio
XM Radio Display Messages
‘‘UPDATING’’
‘‘NO SIGNAL’’
‘‘----’’
‘‘OFF AIR’’
‘‘LOADING’’
‘‘ANTENNA’’
Features
145
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The XM satellites are in orbit over
the equator; therefore, objects south
of the vehicle may cause satellite
reception interruptions. To help
compensate for this, ground-based
repeaters are placed in major
metropolitan areas.
Satellite signals are more likely to be
blocked by tall buildings and
mountains the farther north you
travel from the equator. Carrying
large items on a roof rack can also
block the signal.
Playing the XM Satellite Radio
146
Signal may be blocked by
mountains or large obstacles to
the south.
Signal weaker in
these areas.
SATELLITE
GROUND
REPEATER
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Depending on where you drive, you
may experience reception problems.
Interference can be caused by any of
these conditions:
Driving on the north side of a
large commercial truck on an
east/west road.
Driving in tunnels.
Driving on a road beside a vertical
wall, steep cliff, or hill to the south
of you.
Driving on the lower level of a
multi-tiered road.
Driving on a single lane road
alongside dense trees taller than
50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you.
After you’ve registered with XM
Radio, keep your audio system in the
satellite radio mode while you wait
for activation. This should take about
30 minutes.
Driving on the north side of an
east/west mountain road.
If your XM Radio service has expired
or you purchased your vehicle from
a previous owner, you can listen to a
sampling of the broadcasts available
on XM Satellite Radio. With the
ignition switch in the ACCESSORY
(I) or ON (II) position, push the
PWR button to turn on the audio
system and press the XM RADIO
button. A variety of music types and
styles will play.
If you decide to purchase XM
Satellite Radio service, contact XM
Radio at , or at
1-800-852-9696. You will need to give
them your radio I.D. number and
your credit card number. To get your
radio I.D. number, press the TUNE
bar until ‘‘0’’ appears in the display.
Your I.D. will appear in the display.
Large items carried on a roof rack.
There may be other geographic
situations that could affect XM radio
reception.
While waiting for activation, make
sure your vehicle remains in an open
area with good reception. Once your
audio system is activated, you’ll be
able to listen to XM radio broadcasts.
XM Radio will continue to send an
activation signal to your vehicle for
at least 12 hours from the activation
request. If the service has not been
activated after 36 hours, contact XM
Radio.
As required by the FCC:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
www.xmradio.com
Receiving Satellite Radio Service
Playing the XM Satellite Radio
Features
147
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Playing a CD, CD Changer
148
AM/FM
BUTTON
PRESET BARS
SCAN
BUTTON
AM/FM
BUTTON
PRESET BARS
SCAN
BUTTON
SEEK/SKIP BAR
SEEK/SKIP BAR
CD BUTTON
EJECT BUTTON
REPEAT
BUTTON
CD BUTTON EJECT BUTTON
LOAD BUTTON LOAD INDICATOR
CD SLOT
REPEAT
BUTTON
CD SLOT
RANDOM
BUTTON
RANDOM
BUTTON
U.S. RTS model
U.S. RT and RTX models
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
Playing a CD, CD Changer
Features
149
PRESET BARS
SCAN
BUTTON
PRESET BARS
SCAN
BUTTON
SEEK/SKIP BAR
SEEK/SKIP BAR
EJECT BUTTON
REPEAT
BUTTON
LOAD BUTTON LOAD INDICATOR
CD SLOT
REPEAT
BUTTON
AM BUTTON
FM BUTTON CD SLOT
CD BUTTON
AM BUTTON
FM
BUTTON
CD BUTTON
EJECT BUTTON
RANDOM
BUTTON
RANDOM
BUTTON
Canadian LX model
Canadian EXL model without navigation system
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Playing a CD, CD Changer
150
AM/FM
BUTTON
PRESET BARS
SCAN
BUTTON
PRESET BARS
SEEK/SKIP BAR
SEEK/SKIP BAR
SCAN BUTTON
LOAD BUTTON
CD BUTTON
EJECT BUTTON
CD SLOT
REPEAT BUTTON
RANDOM BUTTON
LOAD INDICATOR RANDOM BUTTON
AM/FM BUTTON
CD BUTTON
REPEAT BUTTON
CD BUTTON
AM
BUTTON
FM BUTTON
RANDOM BUTTON
SEEK/SKIP BAR
SCAN BUTTON
PRESET BARS REPEAT BUTTON
U.S. RTL model without navigation system
Canadian EXL model with navigation system
U.S. RTL model with navigation system
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
The SCAN function
samples all the tracks on the
selected disc in the order they are
recorded. To activate it, press and
release the SCAN button. You will
see SCAN in the display, and you will
get a 10 second sampling of each
track on the selected CD. Press the
SCAN button again to get out of scan
mode.
You can also play 3-inch (8-cm) discs
without using an adapter ring.
With the ignition in the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position,
insert a CD about halfway into the
CD slot. The drive will pull the CD in
the rest of the way and begin to play
it. You operate the CD player with
the same controls used for the radio.
The number of the track playing is
shown in the display. The system will
continuously play a CD until you
change modes.
Push the side of the SEEK/
SKIP bar to play the next track on
thedisc.Pushthe sideonceto
replay the track in play; press it twice
to replay the previous track.
To move rapidly within a track, press
andholdthe orthe side
of the bar.
Press the RPT button
to continuously replay a track. You
will see RPT in the display. Press the
RPT button again to turn it off.
Press the RDM
button to play the tracks in random
order. You will see RDM in the
display. Press the RDM button again
to return to normal play.
RT, RTX, and Canadian LX models
To Change Tracks SCANCD Player
REPEAT
RANDOM
Playing a CD, CD Changer
Features
151
Do not use CDs with adhesive labels.
The label can curl up and cause the CD
to jam in the unit.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
＋
Press the AM/FM button (AM or
FM button) to switch to the radio
while a CD is playing. Press the CD
button to play the CD.
If you turn the system off while a CD
is playing, either with the PWR
button or by turning off the ignition,
the CD stays in the drive. When you
turn the system back on, the CD
begins playing where it left off.
If you select an empty slot in the
magazine, the changer will search
for the next available CD to load and
play.
For information on how to handle
and protect discs, see page .
Press the eject button ( ) to
remove the CD. If you eject the CD,
but do not remove it from the slot,
the system will automatically reload
the CD after 10 seconds and put it in
pause mode. To begin playing, press
the CD button.
An optional six disc CD changer is
available for your vehicle from your
dealer.
This disc changer uses the same
controls used for the in-dash CD
player/changer and the radio.
Load the desired CDs into the
magazine, and load the magazine
into the changer according to the
instructions that came with the unit.
To select the CD changer, press the
AUX button. The disc and track
numbers will be displayed. To select
a different disc, use the preset 5
(DISC ) side for a previous disc or
the preset 6 (DISC ) side to select
the next disc in sequence.
159
RT, RTX, and Canadian LX models
Operating the Optional CD
Changer
To Stop Playing a CD
Protecting Discs
Playing a CD, CD Changer
152
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To load only one CD, press and
release the LOAD button.
Press and hold the LOAD button
next to the CD slot until the load
indicator above the slot turns from
amber to green.
Your audio system has an in-dash
CD changer that holds up to six CDs,
providing several hours of
continuous entertainment. You
operate this CD changer with the
same controls used for the radio.
To load CDs or operate the CD
changer, the ignition switch must be
in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II)
position.
The CD changer is behind the
navigation system screen. To use the
CD changer, press the OPEN button
beside the screen. The screen folds
back, and the CD changer appears.
Be careful not to injure your fingers
when opening or closing the
navigation system screen.
To return the screen to the upright
position, press the OPEN button
again. Do not use the folded screen
as a tray. If you put a cup, for
example, on the screen, the liquid
inside the cup may spill on the
screen when you go over a bump.
1.
CONTINUED
On vehicles with navigation system
On vehicles with navigation system
On RTS, RTL, and Canadian EXL
models
Operating the CD Changer Loading CDs in the In-dash CD
Changer
Playing a CD, CD Changer
Features
153
OPEN BUTTON
LOAD BUTTON LOAD INDICATOR
CD SLOT
Do not use CDs with adhesive labels.
The label can curl up and cause the CD
to jam in the unit.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The indicators above the disc
buttons of the empty positions will
blink, and the green load indicator
above the CD slot comes on.
If you press the LOAD button while
a CD is playing, the system will stop
playing that CD and start the loading
sequence. It will then play the CD
just loaded.
Repeat this until all six positions
are loaded. The system will then
begin playing the first CD loaded.
If you stop loading CDs before all six
positions are filled, the system will
wait for 10 seconds, then stop the
load operation and begin playing the
last CD loaded.
You can also load a CD into an empty
position while a CD is playing by
pressing the appropriate disc button.
Select an empty disc button (the
indicator above the button is off),
and press the button. The system
will stop playing the current CD and
start the loading sequence. It will
then play the CD just loaded.
You cannot load and play 3-inch
(8-cm)discsinthissystem.
Do not try to insert a disc until
‘‘LOAD’’ appears. You could
damage the audio unit.
Insert a CD into the CD slot.
Insert it only about halfway; the
drive will pull it in the rest of the
way. You will see ‘‘BUSY’’ in the
display. The CD load indicator
turns amber and blinks as the CD
is loaded.
When ‘‘LOAD’’ appears again in
the display, insert the next CD into
the CD slot.
Press and hold the LOAD button
until you hear a beep and see
‘‘LOAD’’ in the display, then
release the button.
To load only one CD, press and
release the LOAD button.
On the upper right side of the
display, the disc number for an
empty position will begin blinking,
and the green CD load indicator
will come on.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.
1.
On vehicles without navigation system
Playing a CD, CD Changer
154
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
If you are not loading CDs into all six
positions, press the LOAD button
again after the last CD has loaded.
The system will begin playing the
last CD loaded.
If you stop loading CDs before all six
positions are filled, the system will
wait for 10 seconds, then stop the
load operation and begin playing the
last CD loaded.
Select the CD changer by pressing
the CD button. You will see ‘‘CD’’ in
the display. The system will begin
playing the last selected disc in the
CD changer. You will see the disc
and track numbers displayed.
To select a different disc, press the
appropriate side of a preset bar
(1 6). On models with navigation
system, touch the appropriate disc
icon. If you select an empty position
in the CD changer, the system will
go into the loading sequence.
When that CD ends, the next CD in
the CD changer is loaded and played.
After the last CD finishes, the
system returns to the first CD.
Insert a CD into the CD slot.
Insert it only about halfway; the
drive will pull it in the rest of the
way. You will see ‘‘BUSY’’ in the
display. The CD load indicator
turns red and blinks as the CD is
loaded.
You cannot load and play 3-inch
(8-cm)discsinthissystem.
When ‘‘LOAD’’ appears again in
the display, insert the next CD into
the CD slot.
Do not try to insert a disc until
‘‘LOAD’’ appears. You could
damage the audio unit.
Repeat this until all six positions
are loaded. The system will then
begin playing the last CD loaded.
3.
4.
5.
To Play a CD
Playing a CD, CD Changer
Features
155
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Each time you press and release the
side of the TUNE bar, the
system skips forward to the
beginning of the next track. Press
and release the side to skip
backward to the beginning of the
current track. Press it again to skip
to the beginning of the previous
track.
When you press the SCAN button or
touchtheTRACKSCANicononthe
screen, the first track of the current
disc plays for about 10 seconds. You
will see SCAN in the screen and in
the display. To hear the rest of the
track, press the SCAN button or
touch the TRACK SCAN icon again
within 10 seconds. If you don’t, the
system advances to the next track,
plays about 10 seconds of it, and
continues through the rest of the
tracks the same way. When the
system reaches the last track,
TRACK SCAN is cancelled, and the
CD plays normally.
To move rapidly within a track, press
and hold the or side of the
TUNE bar.
When you press the SCAN button, or
when you touch the DISC SCAN
icon on the screen, the first track of
the current CD plays for about 10
seconds. You will see D-SCAN in the
display and DISC SCAN in the
screen. To hear the rest of the CD,
press the SCAN button or touch the
DISC SCAN icon again, within 10
seconds. If you don’t, the system
advances to the next disc, plays
about 10 seconds of it, and continues
throughout the rest of the CDs the
same way. When the system reaches
the last disc, DISC SCAN is
cancelled, and the CD plays normally.
On vehicles with navigation system
To Change or Select Tracks Track Scan Disc Scan
Playing a CD, CD Changer
156
Main Menu
Table of Contents
When you press the RDM button or
touch the TRACK RANDOM icon on
the screen, the system plays the
tracks of the current disc in random
order. You will see RDM (TRACK
RANDOM) in the display. To turn
this feature off, press the RDM
button (touch TRACK RANDOM)
again.
Operation of DISC SCAN and DISC
REPEAT on the screen is possible
only when the screen is in the
upright position.
When you press and release the RPT
button or touch the TRACK
REPEAT icon on the screen, the
system continuously replays the
current track. As a reminder, you
will see RPT (TRACK REPEAT) in
the display. To turn this feature off,
press the RPT button, or touch the
TRACK REPEAT icon again.
WhenyoupressandholdtheRPT
button until D-RPT (DISC REPEAT)
is in the display, or when you touch
the DISC REPEAT icon on the
screen, the system continuously
replays the current disc. As a
reminder, you will see D-RPT in the
display.
On vehicles with navigation system
On vehicles with navigation system
Track Repeat Random Play within a Disc
Disc Repeat
Playing a CD, CD Changer
Features
157
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To take the system out of CD mode,
press the AM/FM button (AM or
FM button) or XM button (U.S.
models). Each time you press the
AM/FM button (AM or FM button),
the system changes to the next
mode (AM, FM1, or FM2). When
you return to CD mode by pressing
the CD button, play will continue
where it left off.
If you turn the system off while a CD
is playing, either with the PWR
button or the ignition switch, play
will continue at the same point when
youturnitbackon.
When you press the eject button
while listening to the radio, or with
the audio system turned off, the disc
that was last selected is ejected.
After that disc is ejected, pressing
the eject button again will eject the
next disc in numerical order. By
doing this six times, you can remove
all the discs from the changer.
You can also eject discs when the
ignition switch is on or off:
To eject one disc, press and release
the eject button.
To eject all discs, press and hold the
eject button until the LOAD
indicator begins to blink.
To remove the disc from the
changer,firstselectitbypressing
the appropriate preset bar or
corresponding number on the screen.
When that disc begins playing, press
the eject button.
To remove the disc that is currently
playing, press the eject button. You
will see ‘‘EJECT’’ in the display.
When you remove the disc from the
slot, the system begins the load
sequence so you can load another
disc in that position. If you do not
load another CD within 10 seconds,
the system selects the previous
mode [AM, FM1, FM2, or XM Radio
(U.S. models)].
If you do not remove the CD from
the slot, the system will reload the
CD after 10 seconds and put the CD
changer in pause mode. To begin
playing the CD, press the CD button.
To Stop Playing a Disc Removing CDs from the In-dash
CD Changer
Playing a CD, CD Changer
158
Main Menu
Table of Contents
When a CD is not being played, store
it in its case to protect it from dust
and other contamination. To prevent
warpage, keep CDs out of direct
sunlight and extreme heat.
To clean a CD, use a clean soft cloth.
Wipe across the CD from the center
to the outside edge.
AnewCDmayberoughonthe
inner and outer edges. The small
plastic pieces causing this roughness
can flake off and fall on the re-
cording surface of the CD, causing
skipping or other problems. Remove
these pieces by rubbing the inner
and outer edges with the side of a
pencil or pen.
Handle a CD by its edges; never
touch either surface. Do not place
stabilizer rings or labels on the CD.
These, along with contamination
from fingerprints, liquids, and felt-tip
pens, can cause the CD to not play
properly or possibly jam in the drive.
Never try to insert foreign objects in
the CD player or the CD changer.
When using CD-R or CD-RW discs,
use only high quality CDs labeled
for audio use.
When recording a CD-R or
CD-RW, the recording must be
closedforittobeusedbythe
system.
Play only standard round CDs.
Odd-shaped CDs may jam in the
driveorcauseotherproblems.
Handle your CDs properly to
prevent damage and skipping.
General Information Protecting CDs
Protecting Your CDs
Features
159
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Message SolutionCause
If you see an error message in the
display while playing a CD, find the
cause in the chart to the right. If you
cannot clear the error message, take
the vehicle to your dealer.
Press the disc eject button, and remove the
disc(s). Check for an error indication. Insert
the disc(s) again. If the code does not disappear
orthedisc(s)cannotberemoved,consultyour
dealer.
Press the disc eject button, and remove the
disc(s). Check for an error indication. Insert
the disc(s) again. If the code does not disappear
orthedisc(s)cannotberemoved,consultyour
dealer.
Will disappear when the temperature returns to
normal.
Focus Error
Mechanical Error
High Temperature
CD Player/Changer Error Messages
160
Main Menu
Table of Contents
▲▼
▲
▼
▲
▼The VOL button adjusts the volume
up ( ) or down ( ). Press the top
or bottom of the button, hold it until
the desired volume is reached, then
release it.
Three controls for the audio system
are mounted in the steering wheel
hub. They let you control basic
functions without removing your
hand from the steering wheel.
The MODE button changes the
mode. Pressing the button
repeatedly selects FM1, FM2, AM,
XM Radio (U.S. models), CD (if a
disc is loaded) or a tape (if the
optional tape player is installed and a
tape is loaded).
If you are listening to the radio, use
the CH button to change stations.
Each time you press the top ( ) of
the button, the system goes to the
next preset station on the band you
are listening to. Press the bottom
( ) to go back to the previous
station.
IfyouareplayingaCD,thesystem
skips to the beginning of the next
track each time you press the top
( ) of the CH button. Press the
bottom ( ) to return to the
beginning of the current track. Press
it again to return to the previous
track. You will see the disc and track
numbers in the display.
When the appropriate audio unit is
connected to the auxiliary input jack,
press the CD/AUX or AUX button to
select the unit.
The auxiliary input jack is on the tray
above the glove box. The system will
accept auxiliary input from standard
audio accessories.
On RTS, RTL, and Canadian EXL
models On vehicles with navigation system
Auxiliary Input Jack
Remote Audio Controls, Playing an Optional Audio Unit
Features
161
MODE BUTTONVOL BUTTON
CH BUTTON
AUXILIARY
INPUT JACK
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your vehicle’s audio system will
disable itself if it is disconnected
from electrical power for any reason.
To make it work again, you must
enter a specific code with the preset
bars. Because there are hundreds of
number combinations possible from
the five digits, making the system
work without knowing the exact
code is nearly impossible.
Youshouldhavereceivedacardthat
lists your audio system’s code and
serial numbers. It is best to store this
card in a safe place at home. In
addition, you should write the audio
system’s serial number in this owner’s
manual.
If you lose the card, you must obtain
the code number from your dealer.
To do this, you will need the audio
system’s serial number.
If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected or goes dead, or the
radio fuse is removed, the audio
system will disable itself. If this
happens, you will see ‘‘CODE’’ in the
frequencydisplaythenexttimeyou
turn on the system. Use the preset
bars to enter the code. The code is
locatedontheradiocodecard
included in your owner’s manual kit.
When it is entered correctly, the
radio will start playing.
If you make a mistake entering the
code, do not start over; complete the
sequence, then enter the correct
code. You have ten tries to enter the
correct code. If you are unsuccessful
in ten attempts, you must then leave
the system on for 1 hour before
trying again.
Radio Theft Protection
162
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Press and hold the H (Preset 1) side
of the bar until the hour advances to
the desired time. Press and hold the
M (Preset 2) side of the bar until the
minutes advance to the desired time.
To set the time, press the clock set
button until you hear a beep. The
displayed time begins to blink.
If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected or goes dead, you will
need to set the clock. You can quickly set the time to the
nearest hour. If the displayed time is
before the half hour, pressing the
clock set button until you hear a
beep, then pressing the R (Preset 3)
side of the bar sets the clock back to
the previous hour.
If the displayed time is after the half
hour, the clock sets forward to the
beginning of the next hour.
Press the clock set button again to
enter the set time.
For example:
The navigation system receives
signals from the global positioning
system (GPS), and the displayed
time is updated automatically by the
GPS. Refer to the navigation system
manual for how to adjust the time.
1:06 will reset to 1:00
1:52 will reset to 2:00
On models with Navigation System
On vehicles without Navigation System
Setting the Clock
Features
163
CLOCK SET
BUTTON
CLOCK SET
BUTTON
U.S. models are shown.
PRESET BARS
PRESET BARS
RTS, RTL, and
Canadian EXL
models
RT,RTX,and
Canadian LX
models
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The security system automatically
sets 15 seconds after you lock the
doors, hood, and the In-Bed Trunk.
For the system to activate, you must
lock the doors from the outside with
the key, driver’s lock tab, door lock
switch, or remote transmitter. The
security system indicator above the
driver’s door lock tab starts blinking
immediately to show you the system
is setting itself.
Once the security system is set,
opening any door (without using the
key or the remote transmitter), the
hood, or the In-Bed Trunk, will cause
it to alarm. It also alarms if the radio
and navigation components are
removed from the dashboard or the
wiring is cut.
The security system helps to protect
your vehicle and valuables from theft.
The horn sounds and a combination
of headlights, parking lights, license
plate lights, and taillights flash if
someone attempts to break into your
vehicleorremovetheradio.This
alarm continues for 2 minutes, then
the system resets. To reset an
alarming system before the 2
minutes have elapsed, unlock the
driver’s door with the key or the
remote transmitter.
The security system will not set if
the hood, In-Bed Trunk, or any door
is not fully closed. If the system will
not set, check the door and tailgate
open monitor and In-Bed Trunk open
indicator on the instrument panel
(see pages and ) to see if the
doors and In-Bed Trunk are fully
closed. Since it is not part of the
monitor display, manually check the
hood.
Use the remote transmitter
to quickly check that the hood,
In-Bed Trunk, and all doors are
closed. Push the lock button twice
within 5 seconds. There should be an
audible confirmation beep.
Do not attempt to alter this system
or add other devices to it.
64 69
If equipped
Security System
164
NOTE:
SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Cruise control allows you to maintain
asetspeedabove25mph(40km/h)
without keeping your foot on the
accelerator pedal. It should be used
for cruising on straight, open
highways. It is not recommended for
city driving, winding roads, slippery
roads, heavy rain, or bad weather.
Press and release the SET/
DECELbuttononthesteering
wheel. The indicator on the
instrument panel comes on to
show the system is now activated.
Push the CRUISE button. The
indicator in the button will come
on.
Accelerate to the desired cruising
speedabove25mph(40km/h).
1.
2.
3.
CONTINUED
Using the Cruise Control
Cruise Control
Features
165
CRUISE
BUTTON
RES/ACCEL BUTTON
CANCEL
BUTTON
SET/DECEL
BUTTON
Improper use of the cruise
control can lead to a crash.
Use the cruise control only
when traveling on open
highways in good weather.
The main switch can be left on, even
when the system is not in use.
NOTE:
Main Menu
Table of Contents
You can decrease the set cruising
speed in any of these ways:
If you need to decrease your
speed quickly, use the brakes as you
normally would.
Press and hold the SET/DECEL
button. Release the button when
you reach the desired speed.
To slow down in very small
amounts, tap the SET/DECEL
button. Each time you do this,
your vehicle will slow down about
1 mph (1.6 km/h).
Tap the brake pedal lightly with
your foot. The CRUISE
CONTROL indicator on the
instrument panel will go out.
When the vehicle slows to the
desired speed, press the SET/
DECEL button.
You can increase the set cruising
speed in any of these ways:
Press and hold the RES/ACCEL
button. When you reach the
desired cruising speed, release the
button.
To increase your speed in very
small amounts, tap the RES/
ACCEL button. Each time you do
this, the vehicle will speed up
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
Cruise control may not hold the set
speed when you are going up and
down hills. If your speed increases
going down a hill, use the brakes to
slow down. This will cancel cruise
control. To resume the set speed,
press the RES/ACCEL button. The
indicator on the instrument panel will
come back on.
When climbing a steep hill, the
automatic transmission may
downshift to hold the set speed.
Push on the accelerator pedal.
Accelerate to the desired cruising
speed, then press the SET/
DECEL button.
Changing the Set Speed
Cruise Control
166
NOTE:
Main Menu
Table of Contents
When you push the CANCEL button
or tap on the brake pedal, the system
will remember the previously set
cruising speed. To return to that
speed, accelerate to above 25 mph
(40 km/h) and then press and
release the RES/ACCEL button. The
CRUISE CONTROL indicator comes
on. The vehicle will accelerate to the
same cruising speed as before.
Pressing the CRUISE button turns
the system off and erases the
previous cruising speed.
You can cancel cruise control in any
of these ways:
Tap the brake pedal.
Push the CANCEL button on the
steering wheel.
Push the CRUISE button on the
dashboard.
Resting your foot on the brake pedal
causes cruise control to cancel.
Even with cruise control turned on,
you can still use the accelerator
pedal to speed up for passing. After
completing the pass, take your foot
off the accelerator pedal. The vehicle
will return to the set cruising speed.
Resuming the Set SpeedCanceling Cruise Control
Cruise Control
Features
167
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The direction and center position
icons come on when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. The system then begins to
check the vehicle direction and
illuminates the appropriate icon(s).
The compass can be affected by
driving near power lines or stations,
across bridges, through tunnels,
over railroad crossings, past large
vehicles, or driving near large
objects that cause magnetic
interference. It can also be affected
by accessories such as antennas and
roof racks that are mounted by
magnets.
Your vehicle has a compass in the
rear view mirror. The compass
indicates the vehicle direction with
illuminated letters; N (north), S
(south), W (west), and E (east). The
center blue icon in the compass is
always on. It serves as a reference
point.
To turn the compass on or off, press
the compass button on the back of
the rear view mirror.
The compass mirror has a light
sensor behind the right side of the
rear view mirror. Make sure the
extended sun visor or an accessory is
not covering the sensor.
If equipped
Compass Function
Compass
168
COMPASS
BUTTON
CENTER ICON
REAR VIEW MIRROR
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The compass may need to be
manually calibrated after exposure to
a strong magnetic field. If the
compassseemstocontinuallyshow
the wrong direction, do this.
Drivethevehicleslowlyincircles
at less than 5 mph (8 km/h) until
the center icon turns blue. This
icon also turns blue by continuing
to drive the vehicle under normal
driving conditions. When you see
an actual heading on the compass,
calibration is completed.
In most areas, there is a variation
between magnetic north and true
north. Zone selection is required so
the compass can compensate for this
variation. To check and select the
zone, do this:
Find the zone for your area on the
zone map (see page ). Each
zone number (1 through 15)
corresponds to a compass zone on
the table (see page ).
Press and hold the compass
button for about 3 seconds. When
all of the direction icons begin to
blink, release the button.
The blue direction icon(s) blink
and show the current zone.
If the zone is incorrect, press and
release the compass button
repeatedly to get to the correct
number.
The compass will return to the
normal display about 4 seconds
after you stop adjusting a zone
number.
Do this procedure in an open
area, away from buildings, power
lines, and other vehicles.
With the blue center icon
displayed, press and hold the
compass button for about 6
seconds. When the center icon
turns red, release the button.
2.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.
5.
170
170
CONTINUED
Compass Calibration
Compass Zone Selection
Compass
Features
169
NOTE:
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Compass
170
Zone Map
Compass Display for Each Zone
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
Todothis,pressandholdthetwo
outside buttons on the HomeLink
transceiver for about 20 seconds,
until the red indicator flashes.
Release the buttons, then proceed to
step 1.
The HomeLink
universal
transceiver built into your vehicle
canbeprogrammedtooperateupto
three remotely controlled devices
around your home, such as garage
doors, lighting, or home security
systems.
If you are training HomeLink to
operate a garage door or gate, you
should unplug the motor for that
device during training. Repeatedly
pressing the remote control button
could burn out the motor.
HomeLink stores the code in a
permanent memory. There should
be no need to retrain HomeLink if
your vehicle’s battery goes dead or is
disconnected. If your garage door
opener was manufactured before
April 1982, you may not be able to
program HomeLink to operate it.
They do not have the safety feature
that causes the motor to stop and
reverse if an obstacle is detected
during closing, increasing the risk of
injury.
Always refer to the opening
instructions and safety information
that came with your garage door
opener or other equipment you
intend to operate with HomeLink. If
you do not have this information,
contact the manufacturer of the
equipment.
For quick and accurate training,
make sure the remote transmitter
for the device (garage door,
automatic gate, security system, etc.)
has a fresh battery.
If you just
received your vehicle and have not
trained any of the buttons in
HomeLink before, you should erase
any previously learned codes before
training the first button.
If you are training the second or
third buttons, go directly to step 1.
Unplug the garage door opener
motor from the electrical outlet.
Holdtheendofthegaragedoor
opener remote transmitter 2 to 5
inches from HomeLink. Make
sure you are not blocking your
view of the red indicator in
HomeLink.
1.
2.
If equipped
CONTINUED
Training HomeLink
General Information
Important Safety Precautions
Before you begin
HomeLink Universal Transceiver
Features
171
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Plug in the garage door opener
motor, then test the HomeLink
button by pushing it for about 1
second.
If the button works,
programming is complete.
If the button does not work go
to step 6.
Press and hold the remote
transmitter button and one of the
HomeLink buttons at the same
time.
If the red indicator in HomeLink
begins to flash slowly at first,
then rapidly, release both
buttons, and go to step 5.
If the red indicator in HomeLink
continues to flash slowly (does
not flash rapidly), your remote
transmitter may stop
transmitting after a short time.
Go to step 4.
Press and hold the remote
transmitter button and one of the
HomeLink buttons at the same
time. While continuing to hold the
HomeLink button, press and
release the remote transmitter
button every 2 seconds.
If the red indicator in HomeLink
begins to flash slowly at first,
then rapidly, release both
buttons, and go to step 5.
If the red indicator in HomeLink
continues to flash slowly (does
not begin to flash rapidly),
repeat steps 2 thru 4.
Repeat these steps to train the
other two HomeLink buttons to
operate any other compatible
remotely controlled devices
around your home (lighting,
automatic gate, security system,
etc.).
If the indicator flashes rapidly
for 2 seconds then stays on, you
have a rolling code transmitter:
go to ‘‘Training with a Rolling
Code System’’ (see page ).
If the indicator stays on or
flashes slowly, repeat steps 2
thru 5.
PushandholdtheHomeLink
button for a few seconds, then
watch the red indicator on
HomeLink.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
173
HomeLink Universal Transceiver
172
Main Menu
Table of Contents
For security purposes, newer garage
door opening systems use a ‘‘rolling’’
or variable code. Information from
the remote control and the garage
door opener are needed before
HomeLink can operate the garage
door opener.
Find the ‘‘training’’ button on your
garage door opener unit. The
location will vary, depending on
the manufacturer.
Make sure you have properly
completed the ‘‘Training
HomeLink’’ procedure.
Press the HomeLink button again
for about 1 second. It should
operate the garage door.
The ‘‘Training HomeLink’’
procedure trains HomeLink to the
proper garage door opener code.
The following procedure
synchronizes HomeLink to the
garage door opener so it sends and
receives the correct codes.
Press the training button on the
garage door opener unit until the
indicator next to the button comes
on. The indicator may blink, or
comeonandstayon.Youthen
have approximately 30 seconds to
complete the following steps.
Press and hold the button on
HomeLink for 3 to 4 seconds.
Press and hold the HomeLink
button again for 3 to 4 seconds.
This should turn off the training
indicator on the garage door
opener unit. (Some systems may
require you to press the button up
to three times.)
6.
2.
4.
5.
1.
3.
Training With a Rolling Code
System
HomeLink Universal Transceiver
Features
173
TRAINING BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Youshoulderaseallthreecodes
before selling the vehicle.
Toerasethecodesstoredinallthree
buttons, press and hold the two
outside buttons until the red
indicator begins to flash, then
release the buttons.
If you want to retrain a programmed
button for a new device, you do not
have to erase all button memory.
You can replace the existing memory
code using this procedure:
If a standard transmitter was
programmed, the indicator will
stay on for about 25 seconds.
HomeLink
is a registered
trademark of Johnson Controls, Inc.
If you have problems with training
the HomeLink Universal Transceiver,
or would like information on home
products that can be operated by
HomeLink, call (800) 355-3515. On
the Internet, go to
www.homelink.com.
Once the HomeLink indicator
begins to flash slowly, continue to
hold the HomeLink button, and
follow steps 3 thru 6 under
‘‘Training HomeLink’’ (see page
).
If a rolling code transmitter was
previously programmed, the
indicator will flash rapidly for 2
seconds, and then stay on for
about 23 seconds.
Press and hold the HomeLink
button to be trained until the
HomeLink indicator begins to
flash slowly.
1.
2.
171
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
Erasing Codes
Retraining a Button
Customer Assistance
HomeLink Universal Transceiver
174
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
Each tire, including the spare (if
provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to
the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label.
(If your vehicle has tires of a
different size than the size indicated
on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your
vehicle has been equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure
telltale
and
when one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire
pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them to
the proper pressure.
Driving on a significantly under-
inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a
substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s
responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale.
CONTINUED
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Required Federal Explanation
Features
175
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or
alternate tires and wheels allow the
TPMS to continue to function
properly.
Your vehicle has also been equipped
with a TPMS malfunction indicator
to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is provided by
a separate telltale, which displays the
symbol ‘‘TPMS’’ when illuminated.
When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated,
the system may not be able to detect
or signal low tire pressure as
intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a
variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Required Federal Explanation
176
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Before you begin driving your
vehicle, you should know what
gasoline to use and how to check the
levels of important fluids. You also
need to know how to properly store
luggage or packages. The
information in this section will help
you. If you plan to add any
accessories to your vehicle, please
read the information in this section
first.
.............................Break-in Period . 178
.................Fuel Recommendation . 178
.........Service Station Procedures . 179
....................................Refueling . 179
Opening and Closing the
.......................................Hood . 181
...................................Oil Check . 182
.............Engine Coolant Check . 182
...............................Fuel Economy . 183
...Accessories and Modifications . 184
.............................Carrying Cargo . 186
Before Driving
Before Driving
177
Main Menu
Help assure your vehicle’s future
reliability and performance by paying
extra attention to how you drive
during the first 600 miles (1,000 km).
During this period:
Avoid full-throttle starts and rapid
acceleration.
Do not change the oil until the
scheduled maintenance time.
Avoidhardbrakingforthefirst
200 miles (300 km).
Do not tow a trailer.
You should also follow these
recommendations with an
overhauled or exchanged engine, or
when the brakes are replaced.
Your vehicle is designed to operate
on unleaded gasoline with a pump
octane number of 87 or higher. Use
of a lower octane gasoline can cause
a persistent, heavy metallic rapping
noise that can lead to engine damage.
We recommended using a quality
gasoline containing detergent
additives that help prevent fuel
system and engine deposits.
In addition, in order to maintain good
performance, fuel economy, and
emissions control, we strongly
recommend, in areas where it is
available, the use of gasoline that
does NOT contain manganese-based
fuel additives such as MMT.
Use of gasoline with these additives
may adversely affect performance,
and cause the malfunction indicator
lamp on your instrument panel to
come on. If this happens, contact
your authorized dealer for service.
Some gasoline today is blended with
oxygenates such as ethanol or
MTBE. Your vehicle is designed to
operate on oxygenated gasoline
containing up to 10 % ethanol by
volume and up to 15 % MTBE by
volume. Do not use gasoline
containing methanol.
If you notice any undesirable
operating symptoms, try another
service station or switch to another
brand of gasoline.
Premium fuel is recommended when
towing in certain conditions (see
page ).
For further important fuel-related
information, please refer to your
.
224
Break-in Period Fuel Recommendation
Quick Start Guide
Break-in Period, Fuel Recommendation
178
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
Open the fuel fill door by pulling
onthehandletotheleftofthe
driver’s seat.
Park with the driver’s side closest
to the service station pump.
Stop filling the tank after the fuel
nozzle automatically clicks off. Do
not try to ‘‘top off’’ the tank. Leave
some room for the fuel to expand
with temperature changes.
Remove the fuel fill cap slowly.
You may hear a hissing sound as
pressure inside the tank escapes.
The fuel fill cap is attached to the
fuel filler with a tether. Insert the
attachment on the fuel fill cap into
the slit on the fuel fill door.
even though the tank is not full,
there may be a problem with your
vehicle’s fuel vapor recovery
system. The system helps keep
fuel vapors from going into the
atmosphere. Try filling at another
pump. If this does not fix the
problem, consult your dealer.
1.
2.
3.
4.
If the fuel nozzle keeps clicking off
Refueling
Service Station Procedures
Before Driving
179
Pull
FUEL FILL CAP
ATTACHMENT
TETHER
Gasoline is highly flammable
and explosive. You can be
burned or seriously injured
when handling fuel.
Stop the engine, and keep
heat, sparks, and flame away.
Handle fuel only outdoors.
Wipe up spills immediately.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Whenever filling a fuel container,
use an approved fuel container, and
place it on the ground. Do not fill the
fuel container in the vehicle,
including the pickup bed and the
In-Bed Trunk. Make sure to put the
fuel pump nozzle in the fuel filler of
the container securely and to handle
it properly.
Your vehicle has a warning label for
filling a portable fuel container on
the left rear side of the pickup bed.
Before placing the fuel container in
the vehicle, wipe up any spill
completely.
Gasoline or fuel vapors are
extremely flammable and explosive.
Improperly handling fuel can cause
anexplosioninwhichyoucanbe
seriously injured.
Screw the fuel fill cap back on
until it clicks at least once. If you
do not properly tighten the cap,
the malfunction indicator lamp
maycomeon(seepage ).You
will also see a ‘‘TIGHTEN FUEL
CAP’’ message on the information
display.
Push the fuel fill door closed until
it latches.
5.
6.
289
Service Station Procedures
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
180
Do not fill a portable fuel
container in the pickup bed.
Static electricity can ignite gas
vapors and you can be burned.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Put your fingers under the front
edge of the hood. The hood latch
handle is above the ‘‘H’’ logo. Pull
this handle until it releases the
hood, then lift the hood.
Pull the support rod out of its clip,
and insert the end into either of
the designated holes pointed to by
an arrow.
To close the hood, lift it up slightly to
remove the support rod from the
hole. Put the support rod back into
its holding clip. Lower the hood to
about a foot (30 cm) above the
fender, then let it drop. Make sure it
is securely latched.
If the hood latch handle moves
stiffly, or you can open the hood
without lifting the handle, the
mechanism should be cleaned and
lubricated.
Park the vehicle, and set the
parking brake. Pull the hood
release handle under the lower left
corner of the dashboard. The
hood will pop up slightly.
1. 2. 3.
Service Station Procedures
Opening and Closing the Hood
Before Driving
181
HOOD RELEASE HANDLE
LATCH
SUPPORT ROD
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Wait a few minutes after turning the
engine off before you check the oil.
Remove the dipstick (orange loop).
Wipe off the dipstick with a clean
cloth or paper towel.
Insert the dipstick all the way back
into its hole.
Remove the dipstick again, and
check the level. It should be
between the upper and lower
marks.
If it is near or below the lower mark,
see on page .
Look at the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank. Make sure it is
between the MAX and MIN lines. If
it is below the MIN line, see
on page for
information on adding the proper
coolant.
Refer to
on page for information
about checking other items on your
vehicle.
1.
2.
3.
4.
246
249
241
Service Station Procedures
Adding Engine Oil
Engine Coolant CheckOil Check
Adding
Engine Coolant
Owner’s Maintenance
Checks
182
DIPSTICK
UPPER MARK
LOWER MARK
MAX
MIN
RESERVE TANK
Main Menu
Table of Contents
For example,
an underinflated tire
causes more ‘‘rolling resistance,’’
which uses more fuel.
The build-up of snow or mud on
your vehicle’s underside or on the
truck bed adds weight and rolling
resistance. Frequent cleaning
helps your fuel mileage and
reduces the chance of corrosion.
Drive moderately. Rapid
acceleration, abrupt cornering,
and hard braking use more fuel.
Always drive in the highest gear
possible.
Try to maintain a constant speed.
Everytimeyouslowdownand
speed up, your vehicle uses extra
fuel. Use cruise control when
appropriate.
Combine several short trips into
one.
The air conditioning puts an extra
load on the engine which makes it
usemorefuel.Usethefresh-air
ventilation when possible.
Always maintain your vehicle
according to the maintenance
messages displayed on the
information display. See
on page
.241
Improving Fuel Economy
Owner’s
Maintenance Checks
Fuel Economy
Before Driving
183
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your dealer has Honda accessories
that allow you to personalize your
vehicle. These accessories have
been designed and approved for your
vehicle, and are covered by warranty.
Modifying your vehicle, or installing
some non-Honda accessories, can
make it unsafe. Before you make any
modifications or add any accessories,
be sure to read the following
information.
Although non-Honda accessories
may fit on your vehicle, they may not
meet factory specifications, and
could adversely affect your vehicle’s
handling and stability.
When properly installed, cellular
phones, alarms, two-way radios, and
low-powered audio systems should
not interfere with your vehicle’s
computer controlled systems, such
as your airbags and anti-lock brakes.
Before installing any accessory:
Make sure the accessory does not
obscure any lights, or interfere
with proper vehicle operation or
performance.
Be sure electronic accessories do
not overload electrical circuits
(see page ) or interfere with
the proper operation of your
vehicle.
If you install a truck cap, be sure it is
properly installed and does not
exceed your vehicle’s load limits (see
page ).
187
291
Accessories
Accessories and Modifications
Your vehicle should not be used to
carry a slide-in camper.
184
Improper accessories or
modifications can affect your
vehicle’s handling, stability, and
performance, and cause a
crash in which you can be hurt
or killed.
Follow all instructions in this
owner’s manual regarding
accessories and modifications.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Larger or smaller wheels and tires
can interfere with the operation of
your vehicle’s anti-lock brakes and
other systems.
Modifying your steering wheel or
any other part of your vehicle’s
safety systems could make the
systems ineffective.
If you plan to modify your vehicle,
consult your dealer.
Removing parts from your vehicle,
or replacing components with
non-Honda components could
seriously affect your vehicle’s
handling, stability, and reliability.
Some examples are:
Lowering the vehicle with a non-
Honda suspension kit that
significantly reduces ground
clearance can allow the
undercarriage to hit speed bumps
or other raised objects, which
could cause the airbags to deploy.
Raising your vehicle with a
non-Honda suspension kit can
affect the handling and stability.
Non-Honda wheels, because they
are a universal design, can cause
excessive stress on suspension
components and will not be
compatible with the tire pressure
monitoring system.
Before installing any electronic
accessory, have the installer
contact your dealer for assistance.
If possible, have your dealer
inspect the final installation.
Do not install accessories on the
side pillars or across the rear
windows. In these areas,
accessories may interfere with
proper operation of the side
curtain airbags.
Accessories and Modifications
Modifying Your Vehicle
Before Driving
185
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The pickup bed on your vehicle
allows you to carry heavy and large
cargo. You can also store items in
theIn-BedTrunkandonaroof-rack
(if equipped).
Your vehicle also has these
convenient storage areas inside:
Glove box
Front door and seat-back pockets
Fold-up rear seat with under-seat
storage
Console compartment
Pockets on the dashboard
However, carrying too much cargo,
or improperly storing it, can affect
your vehicle’s handling, stability,
stopping distance, and tires, and
make it unsafe. Before carrying any
type of cargo, be sure to read the
following pages.
Carrying Cargo
186
GLOVE BOX
DASHBOARD
POCKETS
PICKUP BED
CONSOLE
COMPARTMENTS
SEAT-BACK POCKETS
FOLD-UP REAR SEAT WITH UNDER-SEAT STORAGE
IN-BED TRUNK
DOOR POCKET
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−×
Locate the statement, ‘‘the
combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed 1,530
(1,480) lbs’’ on your vehicle’s
placard. [The placard is on the
driver’s doorjamb.]
To determine the correct cargo and
luggage load limit:The maximum load for your vehicle
is:
Determine the combined weight
of the driver and passengers that
will be riding in your vehicle.
Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from
1,530 (1,480) pounds.
The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For
example, if the maximum load is
1,530 lbs and there will be five 150
lb. passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and
luggage load capacity is 780 lbs.
[1,530 750 (5 150) = 780 lbs.]
Determine the combined weight
of luggage and cargo being loaded
in the vehicle. That weight may
not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity in
step 4.
If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, load from your trailer will
be transferred to your vehicle.
Consult this manual to determine
how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of
yourvehicle(seepage ).
These figures include the total
weight of all occupants, cargo, and
accessories, and the tongue load if
you are towing a trailer.
In addition, the total weight of the
vehicle, all occupants, accessories,
cargo, and trailer tongue load
must not exceed the gross vehicle
weight rating (GVWR) or the
gross axle weight rating (GAWR).
Bothareonalabelonthedriver’s
doorjamb.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
212
On vehicles without moonroof
On vehicles with moonroof
Carrying Cargo
Load Limits (Payload)
Before Driving
187
1,530 lbs (690 kg)
1,480 lbs (670 kg)
Overloading or improper
loading can affect handling and
stability and cause a crash in
which you can be hurt or killed.
Follow all load limits and other
loading guidelines in this
manual.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Store or secure all items that could
be thrown around and hurt
someone during a crash.
Distribute cargo evenly on the
floor in the In-Bed Trunk, placing
the heaviest items on the bottom
and as far forward as possible. Tie
down items that could be thrown
during a crash or sudden stop.
Make sure the In-Bed Trunk lid is
closed securely before driving.
Be sure the total weight of the
items in the In-Bed Trunk does not
exceed 300 lbs (136 kg).
If you use an accessory roof rack,
the roof rack weight limit may be
lower. Refer to the information that
came with your roof rack.
Be sure items placed on the floor
behind the front seats cannot roll
under the seats and interfere with
the driver’s ability to operate the
pedals, the proper operation of the
seats, or proper operation of the
sensors under the seats.
Keep the glove box closed while
driving. If it is open, a passenger
could injure their knees during a
crash or sudden stop.
Ifyoufoldtherearseatsup,tie
down items that could be thrown
about the vehicle during a crash or
sudden stop. Also, keep all cargo
below the bottom of the windows.
If it is higher, it could interfere
with the proper operation of the
side curtain airbags.
Distribute cargo evenly on the
floor of the cargo area with the
rear seats folded up, placing the
heaviest items on the bottom and
as far forward as possible. Tie
If you carry any items on a roof
rack,besurethetotalweightof
the rack and the items does not
exceed 110 lb (50 kg).
Carrying Items in the Passenger
Compartment
Carrying Cargo in the In-Bed
Trunk or on a Roof Rack
Carrying Cargo
188
down items that could be thrown
about the vehicle during a crash
or sudden stop.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
Your vehicle can carry a large
amount of cargo in the pickup bed.
However, the pickup bed is not
intended for carrying passengers.
Peoplewhorideinthepickupbed
can be very seriously injured or
killed in a crash (see page ).
Make sure your cargo is properly
loaded and all items are secured so
they will not shift or fall out while
driving.
When loading and unloading cargo,
make sure all passengers or any
objects are clear of the tailgate
before opening or closing it. The
tailgate should be closed securely
before driving when it is not used
as the extended pickup bed.
The maximum allowable loading
weight on the pickup bed is 1,100
lbs (500 kg). Do not exceed the
load limit (see page ).
Distribute cargo evenly on the
pickup bed. Place the heaviest
items on the bottom and as far
forward as possible of the rear
axle. Tie down and secure all
items that could be thrown out of
the vehicle during a crash or
sudden stop.
If you stack items higher than the
bed sides, tailgate, or back window,
secure them with a net or cover.
This will reduce the risk of items
beingthrownoutofthepickup
bed during a crash or sudden stop.
When the tailgate is dropped open,
itcanbeusedasanextended
pickup bed. The maximum
allowable weight on the tailgate
while driving is 300 lbs (136 kg).
Exceeding this limit could damage
the tailgate.
Carrying heavy cargo in the
pickup bed will raise your vehicle’s
center of gravity. This can affect
handling and performance. Drive
more slowly and cautiously, and
allow extra time and distance for
braking.
8
187
Carrying Cargo
Carrying Cargo in the Pickup Bed
Before Driving
189
Allowing passengers to ride in
the pickup bed or on the tailgate
can result in death or serious
injury in a crash.
Make sure all passengers ride
in a seat and wear a seat belt
properly.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your vehicle has six tie down cleats
on the pickup bed.
You can also support motorcycles on
the pickup bed floor with the cleats.
The floor panel of the pickup bed is
designed to hold motorcycle tires. Be
sure to tighten motorcycles securely,
with an approved tie-down or
motorcycle strap, according to the
motorcycle maker’s instructions.
They are used to secure cargo on the
pickup bed and to install a cargo net
for securing items. Do not use any
other parts of the pickup bed to
secure cargo or nets.
When carrying motorcycles or any
other cargo, do not spill any oil or
fluid on the pickup bed. A spilled
liquid may damage the pickup bed.
Carrying Cargo
Tie Down Cleats
190
TIE DOWN CLEAT
Never let passengers ride on
the pickup bed or in the In-Bed
Trunk space. This could cause
very serious injuries or death in
a collision. No one should ride
in any position on your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts.
Exceeding load limits or
improperly loading cargo on the
vehicle can cause a crash in
which you can be seriously
injured or killed.
Load the cargo carefully before
starting to drive.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The cargo net can be used to hold
lightweight items in the pickup bed.
Secure all items properly. The net
may not prevent heavy items from
beingthrownoutwardinacrashora
sudden stop.
The cargo cover can be used to
cover the cargo area on the pickup
bed.
Your vehicle’s pickup bed has a rust
resistant surface. To repair small
chips and scratches in the bed, a
repair kit is available from your
dealer. More extensive damage
should be repaired by your dealer.
To avoid problems with the bed
surface and the In-Bed Trunk lid, do
not use spray-in bed liner products.
Carrying Cargo
Optional Cargo Net Optional Cargo Cover
Pickup Bed Repair
Before Driving
191
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Main Menu
This section gives you tips on
starting the engine under various
conditions, and how to operate the
automatic transmission. It also
includes important information on
parking your vehicle, the braking
system, the VTM-4 system, the VSA
system, the tire pressure monitoring
system, and facts you need if you are
planning to tow a trailer.
........................Driving Guidelines . 194
........................Preparing to Drive . 195
.......................Starting the Engine . 196
..............Automatic Transmission . 197
Variable Torque Management
.............4WD (VTM-4) System . 203
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
......................................(TPMS) . 204
...........................................Parking . 206
.............................Braking System . 207
...............Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) . 208
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA)
........................................System . 210
.................Towing Weight Limits . 212
..........Towing Weight Guidelines . 214
...........................Towing a Trailer . 215
Off-Highway Driving
..................................Guidelines . 227
Driving
Driving
193
Main Menu
Your vehicle has higher ground
clearance that allows you to travel
over bumps, obstacles, and rough
terrain. It also provides good
visibility so you can anticipate
problems earlier.
With heavy cargo on the pickup bed,
your vehicle has a higher center of
gravity. Drive slowly and cautiously,
and allow more time and distance for
braking. Loading heavy cargo could
affect your vehicle’s handling and
performance.
To prevent rollovers or loss of
control:
Take corners at slower speeds
than you would with a passenger
vehicle.
Avoid sharp turns and abrupt
maneuvers whenever possible.
Make sure the cargo is properly
loaded and all items are secured so
they will not shift while driving.
Do not modify your vehicle in any
way that would raise the center of
gravity.
Do not carry heavy cargo on the
roof.
Your vehicle allows you to carry
more cargo than a typical passenger
vehicle.
Because your vehicle rides higher
off the ground, it has a high center
of gravity that can cause it to roll
over if you make abrupt turns. Utility
vehicles have a significantly higher
roll over rate than other types of
vehicles.
See page for off-highway driving
guidelines.
227
Driving Guidelines
194
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Youshoulddothefollowingchecks
and adjustments before you drive
your vehicle.
Make sure all windows, mirrors,
and outside lights are clean and
unobstructed. Remove frost, snow,
or ice.
Check that the hood is fully closed.
Check that the tailgate is fully
closed when it is not used as an
extended pickup bed.
Visually check the tires. If a tire
looks low, use a gauge to check its
pressure.
Check that any items you may be
carrying are stored properly or
fastened down securely.
Check the adjustment of the
inside and outside mirrors (see
page ).
Check the steering wheel
adjustment (see page ).
Make sure the doors and In-Bed
Trunk are securely closed and
locked.
Fasten your seat belt. Check that
your passengers have fastened
their seat belts (see page ).
When you start the engine, check
the gauges and indicators in the
instrument panel (see page ).
Check the seat adjustment (see
pages and ).
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
8.
7.
9.
10.
11.
14
110
79
59
98 100
Preparing to Drive
Driving
195
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Apply the parking brake.
In cold weather, turn off all
electrical accessories to reduce
the drain on the battery.
Make sure the shift lever is in
Park. Press on the brake pedal.
Without touching the accelerator
pedal, turn the ignition key to the
START (III) position. Do not hold
the key in the START (III)
position for more than 15 seconds
at a time. If the engine does not
start right away, pause for at least
10 seconds before trying again.
If the engine does not start within
15 seconds, or starts but stalls
right away, repeat step 4 with the
accelerator pedal pressed halfway
down. If the engine starts, release
pressure on the accelerator pedal
so the engine does not race.
If the engine fails to start, press
the accelerator pedal all the way
down, and hold it there while
starting to clear flooding. If the
engine still does not start, return
to step 5.
5.
6.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Starting theEngine
196
The immobilizer system protects your
vehicle from theft. If an improperly-
coded key (or other device) is used, the
engine’s fuel system is disabled. For
more information, see page .
The engine is harder to start in cold
weather. Also, the thinner air found at
altitudes above 8,000 feet (2,400
meters) adds to this problem.
81
Main Menu
Table of Contents
These indicators on the instrument
panel show which position the shift
lever is in.
The ‘‘D’’ indicator comes on for a
few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. If it flashes while driving (in
any shift position), it indicates a
possible problem in the transmission.
If the malfunction indicator lamp
comes on along with the ‘‘D’’
indicator, there is a problem with the
automatic transmission control
system. Avoid rapid acceleration, and
have the transmission checked by
your dealer as soon as possible.
To shift from Park to any position,
pressfirmlyonthebrakepedal,and
pull the shift lever toward you. You
cannot shift out of Park when the
ignition switch is in the LOCK (0) or
ACCESSORY (I) position.
CONTINUED
Shift Lever Position Indicators Shifting
Automatic Transmission
Driving
197
SHIFT LEVER
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−−This position mechani-
cally locks the transmission. Use
Park whenever you are turning off or
starting the engine. To shift out of
Park, you must press on the brake
pedal and have your foot off the
accelerator pedal. Pull the shift lever
towards you, then move it out of
Park.
If you have done all of the above and
still cannot move the lever out of
Park, see on
page .
You must also pull the shift lever
towards you to shift into Park. To
avoid transmission damage, come to
a complete stop before shifting into
Park. The shift lever must be in Park
for you to remove the key from the
ignition switch.
Press the brake
pedal and pull the shift lever towards
you to shift from Park to reverse. To
shift from reverse to neutral, come
to a complete stop, and then shift.
Pull the shift lever towards you
before shifting into reverse from
neutral.
202
To shift from:
PtoR
RtoP
NtoR
Dto2
2to1
1to2
2toD
DtoN
NtoD
RtoN
Do this:
Press the brake pedal, and
pull the shift lever towards
you.
Pull the shift lever towards
you.
Move the shift lever.
Automatic Transmission
Park (P)
Shift Lock Release
Reverse (R)
198
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−−
CONTINUED
Press the D3 switch on the end of
the shift lever to turn this mode on
or off; the D3 indicator comes on
whenever D3 is selected.
TheD3switchcanbeoperatedonly
when the ignition switch is in the ON
(II) position and the shift lever is in
the D position.
Use this position for
your normal driving. The
transmission automatically selects a
suitable gear (1 through 5) for your
speed and acceleration. You may
notice the transmission shifting up at
higher engine speeds when the
engine is cold. This helps the engine
warm up faster.
After you stop in D, 2, 1, N, or R
position with the ignition switch in
the ACCESSORY (I) position for an
extended period, you may not be
able to move the shift lever from
neutral to reverse or Park. In this
case, press the brake pedal, and turn
the ignition switch to the ON (II)
position, then shift out of neutral.
Use neutral if you
need to restart a stalled engine, or if
it is necessary to stop briefly with
the engine idling. Shift to the Park
position if you need to leave your
vehicle for any reason. Press on the
brake pedal when you are moving
the shift lever from neutral to
another gear.
Automatic Transmission
D3
Drive (D)Neutral (N)
Driving
199
D3 SWITCH
Main Menu
Table of Contents
− To shift to second,
pull the shift lever towards you, then
shift to the lower gear. This position
locks the transmission in second
gear. It does not downshift to first
gear when you come to a stop.
Use second gear:
For more power when climbing.
To increase engine braking when
going down steep hills.
For starting out on a slippery
surface or in deep snow.
To help reduce wheel spin.
When driving downhill with a
trailer.
When towing a trailer on level roads
under normal driving conditions, do
not use D3. This will increase the
automatic transmission fluid
temperature and may cause
overheating.
Shifting out of the D position will
cancel D3, and cause the D3
indicator to go out. Selecting the D
position again will resume D3, and
the indicator will come on.
Turning the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position turns D3 off. To
use D3 when you restart the engine,
select the D position, and press the
D3 switch again.
TheD3indicatoralsocomesonfora
few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position.
When D3 is on, the transmission
selects only the first three gears.
Use D3 for engine braking when
going down a steep hill.
Automatic Transmission
Second (2)
200
D3 INDICATOR
Main Menu
Table of Contents
− To shift from second to
first, pull the shift lever towards you,
then shift to the lower gear. This
position locks the transmission in
first gear. By upshifting and
downshifting through 1, 2, and D,
you can operate the transmission
much like a manual transmission
without a clutch pedal.
If you shift into first position when
the vehicle speed is above 28 mph
(45 km/h), the transmission shifts
into second gear first to avoid
sudden engine braking.
If you exceed the maximum speed
for the gear you are in, the engine
speed will enter into the tachometer’s
red zone. If this occurs, you may feel
the engine cut in and out. This is
caused by a limiter in the engine’s
computer controls. The engine will
run normally when you reduce the
rpm below the red zone.
Automatic Transmission
First (1) Engine Speed Limiter
Driving
201
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Remove the key from the shift
lock release slot, then reinstall the
cover. Make sure the notch on the
cover is on the instrument panel
side. Press the brake pedal, and
restart the engine.
Set the parking brake.
Insert a key into the shift lock
release slot.
If you need to use the shift lock
release, it means your vehicle is
developing a problem. Have it
checked by your dealer.
Make sure the ignition switch is in
the LOCK (0) position.
This allows you to move the shift
lever out of Park if the normal
method of pushing on the brake
pedal and pulling the shift lever does
not work.
Putaclothonthenotchofthe
shift lock release slot cover. Using
a small flat-tipped screwdriver or a
metal fingernail file, carefully pry
on the notch of the cover to
remove it.
Push down on the key while you
pull the shift lever towards you
and move it out of Park to neutral.
6.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Shift Lock Release
Automatic Transmission
202
SHIFT LOCK RELEASE SLOT
COVER
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To get unstuck, apply light pressure
to the accelerator pedal. Do not spin
the front tires for more than a few
seconds. Because of the amount of
torque applied to the rear tires, they
should not spin. This is normal. If
you are not able to move the vehicle,
stop and reverse direction.
If you become stuck, you can
activatetheVTM-4bypressingthe
VTM-4 LOCK button while in first
(1), second (2), or reverse (R) gear
below18mph(30km/h).Thismode
overrides the auto system to send
maximum torque to the rear axle.
This mode is only intended for
intermittent use at low speed to free
your vehicle if it becomes stuck or
when you encounter a steep grade
with one wheel on a slippery surface.
Generally, you should first allow the
auto mode to operate to adjust for
the available traction conditions.
The vehicle speed must be below
18 mph (30 km/h).
Move the shift lever to first (1),
second (2), or reverse (R) gear.
Press the VTM-4 LOCK button.
The indicator in the button comes
on.
Your vehicle is equipped with a
variable torque management
4-wheel-drive system (VTM-4) that
distributes engine torque to the
appropriate drive axle depending on
the available traction conditions. The
system is completely automatic,
always active, and does not require
any driver interaction.
1.
2.
3.
CONTINUED
To Engage the VTM-4 Lock:
VTM-4 System
Driving
203
VTM-4 LOCK BUTTON
Do not use the VTM-4 LOCK button on
dry, paved roads. Driving on dry,
paved roads with VTM-4 Lock ON may
damage the rear differential when
making a turn. Strange noise and
vibration can also result.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If the tire is flat, or if the tire
pressure is too low to continue
driving, replace the tire with the
compact spare tire.
If you think you can safely drive a
short distance to a service station,
proceed slowly, and inflate the tire to
the recommended pressure shown
on the driver’s doorjamb.
When this indicator is on, one or
more of your tires is significantly
under inflated. You should stop and
check your tires as soon as possible.
The VTM-4 Lock will temporarily
disengage when the vehicle speed
exceeds 18 mph (30 km/h). The
indicator in the button will remain on.
do
any of the following:
Press the VTM-4 LOCK button.
Each tire has its own pressure
sensor. If the air pressure of a tire
becomes significantly low, the
sensor in that tire immediately sends
a signal that causes the low tire
pressure indicator and the
appropriate tire on the tire pressure
monitor to come on.
Your vehicle is equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that turns on every time you start the
engine and monitors the pressure in
your tires while driving.
Move the shift lever to D.
Turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position.
Low Tire Pressure
Indicator
To Disengage the VTM-4 Lock,
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)
VTM-4 System, Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
204
Do not continuously spin the front tires
of your vehicle. Continuously spinning
the front tires can cause transmission
or rear differential damage.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Each wheel is equipped with a tire
pressure sensor mounted inside the
tire behind the valve stem. You must
use TPMS specific wheels. It is
recommended that you always have
your tires serviced by your dealer or
qualified technician.
The appropriate tire indicator and
low tire pressure indicator comes on
if a tire becomes significantly
underinflated. See
on page .
Driving on a significantly under-
inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
Although your tire pressure is
monitored, each tire should be
checked monthly, including the
spare.
Set to the recommended inflation
pressure as specified on the vehicle
placard and in this owner’s manual
(see page ).
Check the pressure with the tires
cold, after the vehicle has been
parked for at least 3 hours.
This indicator comes on and stays on
if there is a problem with the tire
pressure monitoring system.
If this happens, the system will shut
off and no longer monitor tire
pressures. Have the system checked
by your dealer as soon as possible.
If you have a flat tire, the low tire
pressure and tire monitor indicators
will come on. Replace the indicated
flat tire with the compact spare tire
(see page ).
Never use a puncture-repairing agent
in a flat tire. If used, you will have to
replace the tire pressure sensor.
Havetheflattirerepairedbyyour
dealer as soon as possible.
After you replace the flat tire with
thecompactsparetire,thelowtire
pressure indicator stays on. This is
normal; the system is not monitoring
the spare tire pressure. Manually
check the spare tire pressure to be
sure it is correct.
266
204
275
CONTINUED
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) Indicator
Low Tire
Pressure Indicator
Tire Pressure Monitor
Changing a Tire with TPMS
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Driving
205
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Make sure the moonroof (if
equipped) and the windows are
closed.
Turn off the lights.
Place any packages, valuables, etc.
in the cargo area in your vehicle or
the In-Bed Trunk, or take them
with you.
Lock the doors.
Check the indicator on the driver’s
door to verify that the security
system is set.
Never park over dry leaves, tall
grass, or other flammable
materials. The hot three way
catalytic converter could cause
these materials to catch on fire.
Set the parking brake before you put
the transmission in Park. This keeps
the vehicle from moving and putting
pressure on the parking mechanism
in the transmission.
Always use the parking brake when
you park your vehicle. Make sure
the parking brake is set firmly, or
your vehicle may roll if it is parked
on an incline.
On vehicles with security system
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
Parking TipsParking
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS), Parking
206
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If the brake pads need replacing, you
will hear a distinctive, metallic
screeching sound when you apply
the brake pedal. If you do not have
the brake pads replaced, they will
screech all the time. It is normal for
the brakes to occasionally squeal or
squeak when you apply them.
The hydraulic system that operates
the brakes has two separate circuits.
Each circuit works diagonally across
the vehicle (the left-front brake is
connected with the right-rear brake,
etc.). If one circuit should develop a
problem, you will still have braking
at two wheels.
Your vehicle is equipped with disc
brakes at all four wheels. A power
assist helps reduce the effort needed
on the brake pedal. The anti-lock
brake system (ABS) helps you retain
steering control when braking very
hard.
Constant application of the brakes
when going down a long hill builds
up heat and reduces their effective-
ness. Use the engine to assist the
brakes by taking your foot off the
accelerator and downshifting to a
lower gear.
If the vehicle is facing uphill, turn
the front wheels away from the
curb, and set the parking brake.
If the vehicle is facing downhill,
turn the front wheels toward the
curb, and set the parking brake.
Make sure the parking brake is
fully released before driving away.
Driving with the parking brake
partially set can overheat or
damage the rear brakes.
Resting your foot on the pedal keeps
the brakes applied lightly, builds up
heat, and reduces their effectiveness.
It also keeps your brake lights on all
the time, confusing drivers behind
you.
Check the brakes after driving
through deep water. Apply the
brakes moderately to see if they feel
normal. If not, apply them gently and
frequently until they do. Be extra
cautious and alert in your driving.
Braking System Design
Braking System
Brake Pad Wear Indicators
Parking, Braking System
Driving
207
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The anti-lock brake system (ABS)
helps prevent the brakes from
locking up, and helps you retain
steering control by pumping the
brakes rapidly, much faster than a
person can do it.
The ABS also balances the front-to-
rear braking distribution according
to vehicle loading.
Let the ABS work for you by always
keeping firm, steady pressure on the
brake pedal. This is sometimes
referred to as ‘‘stomp and steer.’’
If this indicator comes on, the anti-
lock function of the braking system
has shut down. The brakes still work
like a conventional system, but
without anti-lock. You should have
your dealer inspect your vehicle as
soon as possible.
If the indicator comes on while
driving, test the brakes as instructed
on page .
You will feel a pulsation in the brake
pedal when the ABS activates, and
you may hear some noise. This is
normal: it is the ABS rapidly
pumpingthebrakes.Ondry
pavement, you will need to press on
thebrakepedalveryhardbeforethe
ABS activates. However, you may
feel the ABS activate immediately if
you are trying to stop on snow or ice.
290
You should never pump the brake pedal.
ABS Indicator
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
208
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If the ABS indicator and the brake
system indicator come on together
and the parking break is fully
released, the front-to-rear braking
distribution system may also shut
down.
Test your brakes as instructed on
page . If the brakes feel normal,
drive slowly and have your vehicle
repaired by your dealer as soon as
possible. Avoid sudden hard braking
which could cause the rear wheels to
lock up and possibly lead to a loss of
control.
The VSA indicator will come on
alongwiththeABSindicator.
Always steer moderately
when you are braking hard. Severe
or sharp steering wheel movement
can still cause your vehicle to veer
into oncoming traffic or off the road.
such as trying to take a
corner too fast or making a sudden
lane change. Always drive at a safe
speed for the road and weather
conditions.
on loose or
uneven surfaces, such as gravel or
snow, than a vehicle without anti-
lock. Slow down, and allow a greater
distance between vehicles under
those conditions.
It only helps with the
steering control during braking.
290
Important Safety Reminders
ABS cannot prevent a loss of
stability.
ABS will not prevent a skid that
results from changing direction
abruptly,
A vehicle with ABS may require a
longer distance to stopABS does not reduce the time or
distance it takes to stop the
vehicle.
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
Driving
209
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The vehicle stability assist (VSA)
system helps to stabilize the vehicle
during cornering if the vehicle turns
more or less than desired. It also
assists you in maintaining traction
while accelerating on loose or
slippery road surfaces. It does this
by regulating the engine’s output and
by selectively applying the brakes.
The VSA system cannot enhance the
vehicle’s driving stability in all
situations and does not control your
vehicle’s entire braking system. It is
still your responsibility to drive and
corner at reasonable speeds and to
leave a sufficient margin of safety.
When VSA activates, you may notice
that the engine does not respond to
the accelerator in the same way it
does at other times. There may also
be some unusual noise from the
modulator. You will also see the VSA
activation indicator blink.
When VSA activates, you will see the
VSA activation indicator blink (see
page ).
If the indicator does not come on
when the ignition switch is turned to
the ON (II) position, there may be a
problem with the VSA system. Have
your dealer inspect your vehicle as
soon as possible.
If the low tire pressure indicator
comes on (see page ), the VSA
system automatically turns on even if
youturnitoffwiththeVSAOFF
button.
Without VSA, your vehicle will have
normal braking and cornering ability,
but it will not have VSA traction and
stability enhancement.
If this indicator comes on while
driving, pull to the side of the road
when it is safe, and turn off the
engine. Reset the system by
restarting the engine. If the VSA
system indicator stays on, or comes
back on while driving, have the VSA
system inspected by your dealer.
67
204
VSA Activation Indicator
Vehicle Stability Assist
(VSA) System Indicator
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System
210
Main Menu
Table of Contents
In certain unusual conditions when
your vehicle gets stuck in shallow
mud or fresh snow, it may be easier
to free it with the VSA temporarily
switched off. When the VSA system
is off, the traction control system is
also off. You should only attempt to
Driving with varying tire or wheel
sizes may cause the VSA to
malfunction. When replacing tires,
make sure they are of the same size
and type as your original tires (see
page ).
If you install winter tires, make sure
they are the same size as those that
were originally supplied with your
vehicle. Exercise the same caution
during winter driving as you would if
your vehicle was not equipped with
VSA.
This switch is above the parking
brake release handle. Press it to turn
the VSA system on and off.
When VSA is off, the VSA activation
indicator comes on as a reminder.
VSA is turned on every time you
start the engine, even if you turned it
off the last time you drove the
vehicle.
269
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System
VSA Off Switch VSA and Tire Sizes
Driving
211
free your vehicle with the VSA off if
you are not able to free it when the
VSA is on.
Immediately after freeing your
vehicle, be sure to switch the VSA on
again. We do not recommend driving
your vehicle with the VSA and
traction control systems switched off.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The maximum weight of the trailer
andeverythinginoronitdependson
the number of occupants in your
vehicleandthetypeoftrailerbeing
towed (see page ).
Towing a load that is too heavy can
seriously affect your vehicle’s
handling and performance.
Your vehicle has been designed to
tow a trailer, as well as carrying
passengers and their cargo. To
safety tow a trailer, you should
carefully observe the load limits (see
page ), use the proper equipment,
and follow the guidelines in this
section.
Be sure to read the
sectiononpage
if you plan to tow off paved
surfaces.
The weight that the tongue of a fully-
loaded trailer puts on the hitch
should follow the recommended load
guidelines (see page ). Too
much tongue load reduces front-tire
traction and steering control. Too
little tongue load can make the
trailer unstable and cause it to sway.
187
214
214
227
Total Trailer Weight Tongue Load
Load Limits
Off-Highway
Driving Guidelines
Towing Weight Limits
212
Exceeding any load limit or
improperly loading your vehicle
and trailer can cause a crash in
which you can be seriously hurt
or killed.
Check the loading of your
vehicle and trailer carefully
beforestartingtodrive.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
Thebestwaytoconfirmthatall
loads are within limits is to check
them at a public scale (see page
).
Add the weight of your trailer (as
quoted by the manufacturer) with
everything in or on the trailer. Then
check the tables on page to
make sure you do not exceed the
limit for your conditions.
To help ensure a safe drive to a scale,
or if you cannot get to a public scale,
we recommend that you estimate
your total trailer weight and tongue
load as described.
The maximum
allowable weight of the vehicle, all
occupants, all accessories, all cargo,
and the tongue load is 6,050 lbs
(2,745 kg).
The GCWR must be reduced 2
percent for every 1,000 feet (305
meters) of elevation.
The maximum
allowable weight of the fully loaded
vehicle and trailer is 10,088 lbs
(4,575 kg) with the proper hitch.
The maximum
allowable weight on the vehicle axles
is 3,105 lbs (1,410 kg) on the front
axle, and 3,245 lbs (1,475 kg) on the
rear axle.
212
214
Estimating LoadsGross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR)
Gross Combined Weight Rating
(GCWR)
Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR)
To Estimate the Total Trailer Weight
Towing Weight Limits
Driving
213
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＊
＊＊
＊
＊＊
−−
Number of
Occupants
2
3
4
5
Max. Trailer Weight Max. Tongue Load
Towing Weight Guidelines
214
Total Trailer Weight and Tongue Load Guidelines:
5000 lbs (2268 kg)
4750 lbs (2155 kg)
4750 lbs (2155 kg)
4500 lbs (2041 kg)
600 lbs (272 kg)
600 lbs (272 kg)
570 lbs (258 kg)
516 lbs (234 kg)
Recommended tongue load should be 5 15% of the total trailer weight for boat trailers, and 10 15% of the total trailer weight for all other
trailers.
The corresponding weight limits assume occupants fill seats from the front of the vehicle to the back, each occupant weighs 150 lbs (70 kg),
and each has 15 lbs (7 kg) of cargo in the cab, pickup bed, or In-Bed Trunk. Any additional weight, including cargo or accessories, reduces
the maximum trailer weight and maximum tongue load. Never exceed the gross axle weight ratings (see page ).
213
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To accurately check your loads at
the public scale, the vehicle and
trailer should be fully loaded, and all
occupants should stay in the vehicle
while the attendant watches the
scale.
Check the front gross axle weight.
Limit: 3,105 lbs (1,410 kg)
Check the gross vehicle weight.
Limit: 6,050 lbs (2,745 kg)
Check the weight of the hitched
trailer. Write this number down.
Remember, maximum gross
combined weight should be
decreased 2 % for every 1,000 feet
(305 meters) of elevation.
Check the gross combined weight.
Limit: 10,088 lbs (4,575 kg)
Remember, maximum gross
combined weight should be
decreased 2 % for every 1,000 feet
(305 meters) of elevation.
If you cannot weigh the rear axle
directly, you can calculate the rear
gross axle weight by subtracting
the weight in step 1 from the
weight in step 2.
Limit: 2,945 lbs (1,335 kg)
Check the rear gross axle weight.
Limit: 3,252 lbs (1,475 kg)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Checking Loads
Towing a Trailer
Driving
215
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Check the weight of the unhitched
trailer. Limit: See page .
Towing generally requires a variety
of supplemental equipment. To
ensure the best quality, we
recommend that you purchase
Honda equipment whenever possible.
Calculate the tongue load.
Subtract the weight in step 6 from
the weight in step 7.
Limit: See page .
Recommended: See page .
Your dealer offers an optional trailer
package for models other than RTX.
The package includes a hitch, a ball
mount, and a wiring harness.
Discuss any additional needs with
your trailer sales or rental agency,
and make sure all equipment is
properly installed, maintained, and
also meets state, federal, province,
and local regulations.
A weight distributing hitch is not
recommended for use with your
vehicle, as an improperly adjusted
weight distributing hitch may reduce
handling, stability, and braking
performance.
Read the trailer manufacturer’s
instructions, and select the
appropriate draw bar for the height
of the trailer you will be towing.
We strongly recommend that you
have your dealer install a class 3
hitch. Using non-Honda equipment
may result in serious damage to your
vehicle.
7.
8.
212
214
214
All models except RTX
Towing Equipment and
Accessories
Hitch
Weight Distributing Hitch
Towing a Trailer
216
Main Menu
Table of Contents
There are two common types of
trailer brakes: surge and electric.
Surge brakes are common for boat
trailers, since the brakes will get wet.
If you choose electric brakes, be
sure they are electronically actuated.
Do not attempt to tap into your
vehicle’s hydraulic system. No
matter how successful it may seem,
any attempt to attach trailer brakes
to your vehicle’s hydraulic system
will lower braking effectiveness and
create a potential hazard.
Seeyourtrailermanufacturerfor
more information on installing
electric brakes.
Honda requires that any trailer with
a total trailer weight of 1,000 lbs (455
kg) or more have its own brakes.
A factory installed, 4-pin gray
connector is located under the
instrument panel near the top of the
parking brake pedal. This connector
has all of the circuits required to
install most electric trailer brake
controllers. A jumper harness to
adapt your electric trailer brake
controller to the vehicle is included
with the optional Genuine Honda
trailer hitch kit. To obtain a trailer
hitch kit, see your dealer.
Have a qualified mechanic install
your trailer brake controller
following the trailer brake controller
manufacturer’s instructions. Failure
to properly install the trailer brake
controller may increase the distance
it takes for you to stop your vehicle
when towing a trailer.
Use this illustration to identify each
terminal in the trailer brake
controller connector.
CONTINUED
Trailer Brakes
Towing a Trailer
Driving
217
BRAKE
(20A)
(BLUE)
GROUND
(BLACK)
ELECTRIC BRAKE
(BROWN/WHITE)
STOP
(WHITE/BLACK)
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Always use safety chains when you
tow a trailer. Make sure the chains
are secured to the trailer and hitch,
and that they cross under the tongue
and can catch the trailer if it
becomes unhitched. Leave enough
slack to allow the trailer to turn
corners easily, but do not let the
chains drag on the ground.
This device is recommended if your
trailer tends to sway. Your trailer
maker can tell you what kind of sway
control you need and how to install it.
Many states and provinces require
special exterior mirrors when towing
a trailer. Even if they don’t, you
should install special mirrors if you
cannot clearly see behind you, or if
the trailer creates a blind spot.
When towing a trailer, we
recommend that you carry a full-size
spare wheel and tire for your vehicle
and trailer. See page for proper
tire size, page for how to store a
full size wheel and tire, and page
for information on changing a
flat tire.
Remember to unhitch the trailer
before changing a flat. Ask your
trailer sales or rental agency where
and how to store the trailer’s spare
tire.
269
280
275
Safety Chains
Sway Control
Trailer Mirrors
Spare Tires
Towing a Trailer
218
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＋
Trailer lights and equipment must
comply with federal, state, province,
and local regulations. Check trailer
light requirements for the areas
where you plan to tow, and use only
equipment designed for your vehicle.
Since lighting and wiring vary with
trailer type and brand, you should
also have a qualified mechanic install
a suitable connector between the
vehicle and the trailer.
Your vehicle is equipped with a
connector to install an optional trailer
lighting connector that mates with
your vehicle.
We recommend that you have your
dealer install a Honda wiring harness
and converter. This harness has
been designed for your vehicle.
Refer to the above illustration for
wiring information.
Trailer Lights
Towing a Trailer
Driving
219
GROUND
(BLACK)
LEFT TURN SIGNAL
AND BRAKE LIGHTS
(GREEN/WHITE)
TAILLIGHTS
(GREEN/BLACK)
ELECTRIC BRAKE
(BROWN/WHITE)
RIGHT TURN SIGNAL
AND BRAKE LIGHTS
(GREEN/RED)
BACK-UP LIGHTS
(BLUE)
GROUND
(BLACK)
B CHARGE
(GREEN)
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your vehicle has a class 3 trailer
hitch as standard equipment.
The cover, the ball mount, the hitch
pin, the hitch pin clip, and the jumper
harness are stored in the In-Bed
Trunk.
Also see page for trailer-related
information.
We recommend that you always use
the cover when you are not using the
ball mount to keep dirt, mud, and
snow from clogging the hitch.
To install the cover, slide it into the
opening at the end of the trailer
hitch. To remove the cover, pull it
out and store it in a safe place.
Install the ball mount before you tow
a trailer. Check for and remove
foreign material inside of the trailer
hitch before installing the ball mount.
To install the ball mount, slide it into
the trailer hitch. Line up the holes in
the trailer hitch with the holes in the
ball mount, then insert the hitch pin
into the hole. Secure the hitch pin
with the hitch pin clip.
218
On U.S. RTX model only
Towing a Trailer
Towing Equipment
Installing the Cover Installing the Ball Mount
220
TRAILER HITCH
7-PIN TRAILER CONNECTOR
4-PIN TRAILER
CONNECTOR
TRAILER HITCH
COVER
HITCH PIN
HITCH PIN
CLIP
BALL MOUNT
TRAILER HITCH
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
The 7-pin trailer connector is needed
for the trailer lights. To connect the
connector, do this:
Make sure the connector and the
socketarefreeofdirt,moisture,
or other foreign material.
Open the socket lid by pulling it up.
Insert the connector securely into
the socket.
Hook the retaining tab on the
inner side of the lid against the
retaining tab of the connector to
prevent disconnection during
operation.
Remove the socket cover, and
attach it securely over the socket.
Insert the connector into the
socket securely to prevent
disconnection during operation.
The 4-pin trailer connector is also
needed for the trailer lights. To
connect the connector, do this:
1. 1.
2.
3.
4.
2.
Towing a Trailer
Connecting the Trailer Connectors
Driving
221
7-PIN TRAILER CONNECTOR
SOCKET
RETAINING
TAB
RETAINING
TAB
LID
4-PIN TRAILER CONNECTOR
SOCKET
COVER
7-PIN TRAILER
CONNECTOR
4-PIN TRAILER
CONNECTOR
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To disconnect the connectors,
reverse the connection steps, then
make sure the socket lid and
socket cover are securely in place.
Avoid using excessive force when
disconnecting the connectors.
Electric current flows through the
electrical supply circuit only when
the ignition switch is in the ON
(II) position.
Using the electrical supply circuit
when the engine is at a stop or
idling can discharge the battery.
Before you submerge the trailer
hitchinwater(suchasataboat
ramp), make sure the connectors
are removed and the socket lid
and socket cover are securely in
place. Failure to do this will result
in electrical system problems.
After the connectors are
submergedinwater,openthe
socket lid and the socket cover to
drain them.
Towing a Trailer
Important Precautions
222
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＋
Refer to the above illustrations for
wiring information.
The trailer jumper harness is used to
install the controller for the electric
trailer brakes. For more information,
see on page .217
Towing a Trailer
Trailer Connector Sockets
Trailer Brakes
Trailer Jumper Harness
Driving
223
7-PIN TRAILER SOCKET
ELECTRIC
BRAKE
(BLUE)
SMALL
LIGHT
(GREEN)
B
CHARGE
(BLACK)
BACK LIGHT
(YELLOW)
GROUND
(WHITE)
4-PIN TRAILER SOCKET
GROUND
(WHITE)
GROUND
(BLACK)
ELECTRIC BRAKE
(BROWN/WHITE)
BRAKE LIGHTS
(WHITE/BLACK)
BRAKE
(20A)
(WHITE)
LEFT TURN/
STOP
(YELLOW)
RIGHT TURN/
STOP
(GREEN)
SMALL LIGHTS
(BROWN)
RIGHT
TURN/
STOP
(BROWN)
LEFT
TURN/
STOP
(RED)
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The added weight, length, and
height of a trailer will affect your
vehicle’s handling and performance,
so driving with a trailer requires
some special driving skills and
techniques.
Your vehicle tires and spare are in
good condition and properly
inflated.
The trailer tires and spare are in
good condition and inflated as
recommended by the trailer
maker.
The vehicle has been properly
serviced, and the tires, brakes,
suspension, cooling system, and
lights are in good operating
condition.
The trailer has been properly
serviced and is in good condition.
All weights and loads are within
limits.
Thehitch,safetychains,andany
other attachments are secure.
Allitemsonandinthetrailerare
properly secured and cannot shift
while you drive.
Towing performance can be
affected by high altitude, high
temperature, or when climbing
steep grades. Therefore, premium
fuel (premium unleaded gasoline
with pump octane number of 91 or
higher) is recommended when
towing more than 3,500 lbs (1,590
kg).
Foryoursafetyandthesafetyof
others,taketimetopracticedriving
maneuvers before heading for the
open road, and follow the guidelines
below.
Avoid towing a trailer during your
vehicle’s first 600 miles (1,000 km).
When preparing to tow, and before
driving away, be sure to check the
following:
Driving Safely With a TrailerPre-Tow Checklist
Towing a Trailer
Break-In Period
224
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Ifyoumuststopwhenfacinguphill,
use the foot brake or parking brake.
Do not try to hold the vehicle in
place by pressing on the accelerator,
as this can cause the automatic
transmission to overheat.
When driving down hills, reduce
your speed, and use D3. Do not
‘‘ride’’ the brakes.
Drive slower than normal in all
driving situations, and obey posted
speed limits for vehicles with trailers.
When towing a fixed-sided trailer
(e.g., camper), do not exceed 55 mph
(88 km/h). At higher speeds, the
trailer may sway or affect vehicle
handling.
Crosswinds and air turbulence
caused by passing trucks can disrupt
your steering and cause trailer to
sway. When being passed by a large
vehicle, keep a constant speed, and
steer straight ahead. Do not try to
make quick steering or braking
corrections.
When towing a trailer on level roads
under normal driving conditions, do
not use D3. This will increase the
automatic transmission fluid
temperature and may cause
overheating.
Maketurnsmoreslowlyandwider
than normal. The trailer tracks a
smaller arc than your vehicle, and it
canhitorrunoversomethingthe
vehicle misses.
Allow more time and distance for
braking. Do not brake or turn
suddenly as this could cause the
trailer to jackknife or turn over.
When climbing hills, closely watch
your temperature gauge. If it nears
the red (Hot) mark, turn the air
conditioning off, reduce speed and, if
necessary, pull to the side of the
road to let the engine cool.
With heavy cargo on the pickup bed,
your vehicle has a higher center of
gravity. Drive more slowly and
cautiously. Loading heavy cargo
could affect your vehicle’s handling
and performance.
CONTINUED
Remember, it
takes longer to slow down and
stop when towing a trailer.
Towing Speeds and Gears
Handling Crosswinds and Buff eting
Making Turns and Braking
Driving on Hills
Towing a Trailer
Driving
225
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Always drive slowly and have
someone guide you when backing up.
Grip the of the steering wheel,
then turn the wheel to the left to get
the trailer to move to the left. Turn
the wheel to the right to move the
trailer to the right.
Do not park on an incline unless it is
unavoidable. If you must park on an
incline, follow the steps below to
help prevent the vehicle and trailer
from rolling and possibly injuring
someone.
Turn the front wheels toward the
curb on a downhill, and away from
the curb on an uphill.
With the foot brake fully pressed,
have someone place wheel chocks
on the downhill side of the vehicle
and trailer wheels.
Firmly apply the parking brake
before you put the transmission in
Park. This keeps the vehicle from
putting pressure on the parking
mechanism in the transmission. It
also makes it easier to move the
shift lever out of Park when you
want to drive away.
When parking on level ground,
follow all normal precautions (see
page ) including putting the
transmission in Park, and firmly
setting the parking brake.
If the vehicle’s tires slip when
retrieving a boat from the water,
shift to first gear, and turn on VTM-4
lock (see page ). Disengage
VTM-4 lock as soon as the boat is
out of the water to prevent damage
to the VTM-4 system.
1.
2.
3.
206
203
bottom
Backing Up
Parking
Retrieving a Boat
Towing a Trailer
226
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your vehicle has been designed
primarily for use on pavement. But
its higher ground clearance and four-
wheel drive VTM-4 system allow you
to occasionally travel on unpaved
roads and surfaces. Your vehicle is
not designed for trailblazing,
mountain climbing, or other
challenging off-road activities.
If you decide to drive on unpaved
roads, you will find that it requires
somewhat different driving skills.
Your vehicle will also handle
somewhat differently than it does on
pavement. Be sure to pay extra
attention to the precautions and tips
in this section, and get acquainted
with your vehicle before leaving the
pavement.
General Information
Off-Highway Driving Guidelines
Driving
227
Improperly operating this
vehicle on or off-pavement can
cause an accident or rollover in
which you and your passengers
could be seriously injured or
killed.
Follow all instructions and
guidelines in this owner’s
manual.
Keep your speed low, and
don’t drive faster than
conditions permit.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Before you leave the pavement, be
sure to do all scheduled maintenance
and service, and inspect your vehicle
for any problems. Pay special
attention to the condition of the tires,
and check the tire pressures.
After you return to the pavement,
carefully inspect your vehicle to
make sure there is no damage that
could make driving it unsafe.
Recheck the condition of the tires
and the tire pressures.
The route presents limits (too steep
or bumpy roads). You have limits
(driving skill and comfort). And your
vehicle has limits (traction, stability,
and power).
Driving off-highway can be
hazardous if you fail to recognize
limits and take the proper
precautions.
To avoid loss of control or rollover,
be sure to follow all precautions and
recommendations.
Be sure to store cargo properly
and do not exceed your cargo load
limits (see page and ).
Be aware that a heavy load can
reduce ground clearance and your
ability to clear obstacles.
Whenever you drive, make sure
you and your passengers always
wear seat belts.
Keep your speed low, and never
go faster than the conditions allow.
It’s up to you to continually assess
the situation and drive within the
limits.
187 212
Check Out Your VehicleRememberImportant Safety Precautions
Off-Highway Driving Guidelines
228
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Forbettertractiononallsurfaces,
accelerate slowly and gradually build
up speed. If you try to start too fast
on wet soil, mud, snow, or ice, you
might not have enough traction to
get underway, and you may dig
yourself a hole. Starting with the
shift lever in second (2) gear will
help you have a smoother start on
snow or ice.
Keep in mind that you will usually
need more time and distance to
brake to a stop on unpaved surfaces.
Avoid hard braking. Do not ‘‘pump’’
the brakes; let the anti-lock braking
system pump them for you.
Your vehicle is not equipped with
undercarriage guards to protect key
components, so take care to avoid
rocks, tree stumps, and other
obstacles in your path.
Because your vehicle has a higher
center of gravity than a conventional
passenger vehicle, driving a wheel
over a tall object, or allowing a wheel
to drop into a deep hole, can cause
your vehicle to tip or roll over.
If you can’t clearly see all conditions
or obstacles on a slope, walk the
slope before you drive on it. If you
have any doubt whether or not you
can safely drive on the slope, don’t
do it. Find another route.
If you are driving up a hill and find
that you cannot continue,
. Your vehicle could roll
over. Slowly back down the hill,
following the same route you took up
the hill.
do not try to
turn around
Accelerating and Braking Avoiding Obstacles Driving on Slopes
Off-Highway Driving Guidelines
Driving
229
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The banks and surface under the
water provide good traction. The
water may hide hazards such as
rocks, holes, or mud.
Before driving through water, stop,
get out if necessary, and make sure
that:
If you decide it is safe to drive
through water, choose a suitable
speed, and proceed without shifting,
changing speeds, stopping, or
shutting off the engine.
Do not try to cross water at high
speeds, as this may cause severe
damage to the cooling system or
result in loss of control.
After driving through water, test
your brakes. If they got wet, gently
‘‘pump’’ them while driving slowly
until they operate normally.
If the water is deeper than the wheel
hubs, some additional service may
be required. This service is not
covered by your warranties.
The water is not flowing too fast.
Deep rushing water can sweep you
downstream. Even very shallow
rushingwatercanwashthe
ground from under your tires and
cause you to lose traction and
possibly roll over.
The banks are sloped so you can
drive out.
The water is not deep enough to
cover your wheel hubs, axles, or
exhaust pipe. You could stall and
not be able to restart your engine.
The water can also damage
important vehicle components.
If you get stuck, and cannot get
unstuck with the VTM-4 system,
engage the VTM-4 Lock (see page
), and carefully try to go in the
direction (forward or reverse) that
you think will get you unstuck. Do
notspinthetiresathighspeeds.It
will not help you get out and may
cause damage to the transmission or
VTM-4 system.
If you are still unable to free yourself,
your vehicle is equipped with front
and rear tow hooks designed for this
purpose (see page ).297
203
If You Get StuckCrossing a Stream
Off-Highway Driving Guidelines
230
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Use a nylon strap to attach your
vehicle to the recovery vehicle, and
carefully take out the slack in the
strap. Once the strap is tight, the
recovery vehicle should apply force.
Remember that the recovery vehicle
needs good traction to avoid
becoming stuck, too.
You should never use a jack to try to
get unstuck. Your vehicle could
easily slip off the jack and hurt you
or someone else.
You may safely tow a trailer off-road
if you follow these guidelines:
Do not exceed the trailer weight
or tongue limits (see page ).
Stay on smooth, level dirt roads,
and avoid driving in hilly terrain.
Allow extra room for starting,
stopping, and turning.
Slow down if you encounter bumps
or other obstacles.
214
Towing a Trailer Off-Road
Off-Highway Driving Guidelines
Driving
231
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Main Menu
This section explains why it is
important to keep your vehicle well
maintained and how to follow basic
maintenance safety precautions.
If you have the skills and tools to
perform more complex maintenance
tasks on your vehicle, you may want
to purchase the service manual. See
page for information on how to
obtain a copy, or see your dealer.
This section also includes
instructions on how to read the
maintenance minder messages on
the information display, a
maintenance record, and instructions
for simple maintenance tasks you
may want to take care of yourself.
......................Maintenance Safety . 234
....................Maintenance Minder . 235
....................Maintenance Record . 243
..............................Fluid Locations . 245
........................Adding Engine Oil . 246
Changing the Engine Oil and
...........................................Filter . 247
..............................Engine Coolant . 249
....................Windshield Washers . 250
....Automatic Transmission Fluid . 251
.................Rear Differential Fluid . 252
.............Transfer Assembly Fluid . 253
....................................Brake Fluid . 253
....................Power Steering Fluid . 254
....................................Timing Belt . 254
.............................................Lights . 255
................Cleaning the Seat Belts . 261
.....................................Floor Mats . 261
..................Dust and Pollen Filter . 262
.................................Wiper Blades . 262
...........................................Wheels . 264
...............................................Tires . 265
...................Checking the Battery . 270
.............................Vehicle Storage . 272
315
Maintenance
Maintenance
233
Main Menu
To eliminate potential hazards, read
the instructions before you begin,
and make sure you have the tools
and skills required.
All service items not detailed in this
section should be performed by a
certified technician or other qualified
mechanic.
Make sure your vehicle is parked
on level ground, the parking brake
is set, and the engine is off.
To clean parts, use a commercially
available degreaser or parts
cleaner, not gasoline.
To reduce the possibility of fire or
explosion, keep cigarettes, sparks,
and flames away from the battery
and all fuel-related parts.
Wear eye protection and
protective clothing when working
with the battery or compressed air.
Be sure there is
adequate ventilation whenever you
operate the engine.
Some of the most important safety
precautions are given here. However,
we cannot warn you of every
conceivable hazard that can arise in
performing maintenance. Only you
can decide whether or not you
should perform a given task.
Do
not run the engine unless
instructed to do so.
Let the
engine and exhaust system cool
down before touching any parts.
Maintenance Safety
Important Safety Precautions
Carbon Monoxide poison from
engine exhaust.
Potential Vehicle Hazards
Injury from moving parts.
Burns from hot parts.
234
Improperly maintaining this
vehicle, or failing to correct a
problem before driving can
cause a crash in which you can
be seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the inspection
and maintenance
recommendations and
schedules in this owner’s
manual.
Failure to properly follow
maintenance instructions and
precautions can cause you to
be seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the procedures
and precautions in this owner’s
manual.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
CONTINUED
Calculated Engine
Oil Life (%)
100 % 91 %
90 % 81 %
80 % 71 %
70 % 61 %
60 % 51 %
50 % 41 %
40 % 31 %
30 % 21 %
20 % 16 %
15 % 11 %
10 % 6 %
5% 1%
0%
Displayed
Engine Oil Life (%)
100 %
90 %
80 %
70 %
60 %
50 %
40 %
30 %
20 %
15 %
10 %
5%
0%
The remaining engine oil life is
displayed on the engine oil life
display according to the table shown
below.
Based on the engine operating
conditions and accumulated engine
revolutions, the onboard computer in
your vehicle calculates the remaining
engine oil life and displays it as a
percentage.
Your vehicle displays engine oil life
and maintenance service items on
the information display to show you
when you should have your dealer do
engine oil replacement and indicated
maintenance service.
To see the current engine oil life,
turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position, and press the SELECT
button repeatedly until the engine oil
life display appears (see page ).70
Maintenance Minder
Engine Oil Life Display
Maintenance
235
MAINTENANCE MINDER
INDICATOR
ENGINE OIL LIFE
DISPLAY
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The maintenance item code(s)
indicate the main and sub items
required at the time of the oil change
(see page ).
If the engine oil life is 15 percent or
less, you will see ‘‘SERVICE dUE
SOON’’ message in the information
display every time you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. The maintenance minder
indicator will also come on, and the
maintenance item code(s) for other
scheduled maintenance items
needing service will be displayed
below the message.
When the remaining engine oil life is
less than 5 percent, you will see a
‘‘SERVICE dUE NOW’’ message
along with the same maintenance
item code(s), every time you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position.
The message changes between
SERVICE and dUE SOON
repeatedly.
The message changes between
SERVICE and dUE NOW repeatedly.
242
Maintenance Minder
236
MAINTENANCE ITEM CODES
MAINTENANCE MAIN ITEM
MAINTENANCE SUB ITEMS
MAINTENANCE ITEM CODES
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Maintenance Minder
Maintenance
237
When you see this message, have
the indicated maintenance
performed by your dealer as soon as
possible.
When the remaining engine oil life is
0 percent, you will see ‘‘SERVICE
PAST dUE’’ message every time you
turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position.
The message changes between
SERVICE and PAST dUE repeatedly.
If you still do not perform the
indicated maintenance, you will see a
negative mileage, for example ‘‘34
MI (54 KM)’’ with the message
‘‘PAST dUE.’’ This negative mileage
means that you should have
performed the indicated
maintenance 34 miles (54
kilometers) ago. Immediately have
the indicated maintenance
performed, and make sure to reset
the display as described on page .238
CONTINUED
NEGATIVE MILEAGE
U.S.
Canada
NEGATIVE MILEAGE
Main Menu
Table of Contents
You can change the display to the
engine oil life display, or the
odometer and trip meter by pushing
the SELECT button on the
instrument panel.
All maintenance items displayed in
the trip meter are in code. For an
explanation of these maintenance
codes, see page .
Your dealer will reset the display
after completing the required
maintenance service. You will see
‘‘OIL LIFE 100 %’’ on the information
display the next time you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position.
If maintenance service is done by
someone other than your dealer,
reset the maintenance minder as
follows:
Press the SELECT button
repeatedly until the engine oil life
display or the service message is
displayed.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position.
1.
2.242
Maintenance Main Items and Sub
Items
Resetting the Engine Oil Life
Display
Maintenance Minder
238
MAINTENANCE MAIN ITEM
MAINTENANCE SUB ITEMS
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＞
＞
＞＞
＞Press the RESET button for about
10 seconds. You will see a
‘‘MAINT RESET’’ message.
Select the appropriate answer,
‘‘MAINT RESET N’’ (NO) or
‘‘MAINT RESET Y’’ (YES) by
pressing the SELECT button.
‘‘ N’’ or ‘‘ Y’’ is displayed on the
outside temperature display.
Select the ‘‘MAINT RESET Y’’
(YES),andpressandholdthe
RESET button again to reset the
engine oil life to ‘‘100.’’
3. 4. 5.
Maintenance Minder
Maintenance
239
YES is shown.
NO is shown.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＃
If you have the required service
done but do not reset the display, or
reset the display without doing the
service, the system will not show the
proper maintenance intervals. This
canleadtoseriousmechanical
problems because you will no longer
have an accurate record of when
maintenance is needed.
Your authorized Honda dealer
knows your vehicle best and can
provide competent, efficient service.
However, service at a dealer is not
mandatory to keep your warranties
in effect. Maintenance may be done
by any qualified service facility or
person who is skilled in this type of
automotive service. Make sure to
have the service facility or person
reset the display as previously
described. Keep all receipts as proof
of completion, and have the person
who does the work fill out the
maintenance record. Check your
warranty booklet for more
information.
We recommend the use of Honda
parts and fluids whenever you have
maintenance done. These are
manufactured to the same high-
quality standards as the original
components, so you can be confident
of their performance and durability.
U.S. Vehicles:
According to state and federal
regulations, failure to perform
maintenance on the items marked
with will not void your emissions
warranties. However, all
maintenance services should be
performed in accordance with the
intervals indicated by the
information display.
Maintenance Minder
Important Maintenance
Precautions Maintenance, replacement, or
repair of emissions control
devices and systems may be done
by any automotive repair
establishment or individual using
parts that are ‘‘certified’’ to EPA
standards.
240
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
−
−
Youshouldcheckthefollowing
items at the specified intervals. If
you are unsure of how to perform
any check, turn to the appropriate
page listed.
Engine oil level Check every
time you fill the fuel tank. See
page .
Engine coolant level Check the
radiator reserve tank every time
you fill the fuel tank. See page .
Automatic transmission Check
the fluid level monthly. See page
.
Brakes Check the fluid level
monthly. See page .
Tires Check the tire pressure
monthly. Examine the tread for
wear and foreign objects. See page
.
Lights Check the operation of
the headlights, parking lights,
taillights, high-mount brake light,
and license plate lights monthly.
See page .
182
182
251
253
265
255
CONTINUED
Maintenance Minder
Owner’s Maintenance Checks
Maintenance
241
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＊
＊
＃
＃
＃
＊
Maintenance Minder
242
:
Maintenance Sub Items
Replace dust and pollen filter
Inspect drive belt
Replace transmission and transfer fluid
Replace spark plugs
Replace timing belt and inspect water pump
Inspect valve clearance
Replace engine coolant
Replace VTM-4 rear differential fluid
Maintenance Main Items
Replace engine oil
Replace engine oil and oil filter
Inspect front and rear brakes
Check parking brake adjustment
Inspect these items:
Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and boots
Suspension components
Driveshaft boots
Brake hoses and lines (including ABS)
All fluid levels and condition of fluids
Exhaust system
Fuel lines and connections
Maintenance Sub Items
Rotate tires
Replace air cleaner element
If you drive in dusty conditions, replace
every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
2
3
4
5
Symbol
A
B
Symbol
1
2
Symbol
6
If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high
concentrations of soot in the air from industry and from diesel-
powered vehicles, replace every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle speeds or
trailer towing results in higher transmission and transfer
temperatures or frequently fully loaded. This requires
transmission and transfer fluid changes more frequently
than recommended by the Maintenance Minder.
If you regulary drive your vehicle under these conditions, have
the transmission and transfer fluid changed every 30,000 miles
(48,000 km).
If you drive regularly in very high temperatures (over 110°F,
43°C), in very low temperatures (under-20°F, -29°C), or towing a
trailer, replace every 60,000 mile (U.S.)/100,000 km (Canada)
Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle speeds or
trailer towing results in higher level of mechanical (shear) stress
to fluid or frequently fully loaded. This requires differential fluid
changes more frequently than recommended by the
Maintenance Minder. If you regularly drive your vehicle under
these conditions, have the differential fluid changed at
7,500 miles (12,000 km), then every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
1
1
If the message ‘‚SERVICE DUE NOW’’ does not appear more than 12 months
after the display is reset, change the engine oil every year.
See information on maintenance and emissions warranty on page .
Independent of the maintenance messages in the information display,
replace the brake fluid every 3 years.
Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000 km).
Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 only if they are noisy.
NOTE:
1:
240
Maintenance Minder
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
Maintenance Record
Maintenance
243
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
You or the servicing dealer can record all completed maintenance here. When maintenance is performed, record the mileage, circle the coded item(s)
completed, and write in any other non-coded items (such as brake fluid replacement) below the codes. Keep the receipts for all work done on your
vehicle. Maintenance can also be recorded in your Honda service history booklet.
Mileage
km
km
km
km
km
km
km
Maintenance
Performed
AB123456
AB123456
AB123456
AB123456
AB123456
AB123456
AB123456
Signature
Date
Mileage
km
km
km
km
km
km
km
Signature
Date
Maintenance
Performed
AB123456
AB123456
AB123456
AB123456
AB123456
AB123456
AB123456
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Maintenance Record
244
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
Mileage
km
km
km
km
km
km
km
Signature
Date
Maintenance
Performed
AB123456
AB123456
AB123456
AB123456
AB123456
AB123456
AB123456
Mileage
km
km
km
km
km
km
km
Signature
Date
Maintenance
Performed
AB123456
AB123456
AB123456
AB123456
AB123456
AB123456
AB123456
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＊
＊
Fluid Locations
Maintenance
245
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK
(Orange loop)
WASHER FLUID
(Blue cap)
RADIATOR CAP
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
FLUID DIPSTICK
(Yellow loop)
BRAKE FLUID
(Gray cap)
ENGINE
COOLANT
RESERVOIR
POWER STEERING
FLUID (Red cap)
ENGINE OIL FILL CAP
: Under the gray cover
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Oil is a major contributor to your
engine’s performance and longevity.
Always use a premium-grade 5W-20
detergent oil displaying the API
Certification Seal. This seal indicates
the oil is energy conserving, and that
it meets the American Petroleum
Institute’s latest requirements.
Honda Motor Oil is the preferred
5W-20 lubricant for your vehicle. It is
highly recommended that you use
Honda Motor Oil in your vehicle for
optimum engine protection. Make
sure the API Certification Seal says
‘‘For Gasoline Engines.’’
The oil viscosity or weight is
provided on the container’s label.
5W-20 oil is formulated for year-
round protection of your vehicle to
improve cold weather starting and
fuel economy.Unscrew and remove the engine oil
fill cap on the valve cover. Pour in
the oil slowly and carefully so you do
not spill any. Clean up any spills
immediately. Spilled oil could
damage components in the engine
compartment. Reinstall the engine
oil fill cap, and tighten it securely.
Wait a few minutes, and recheck the
oil level on the engine oil dipstick.
Do not fill above the upper mark; you
could damage the engine.
Recommended Engine Oil
Adding Engine Oil
246
API CERTIFICATION SEAL
Ambient Temperature
ENGINE OIL FILL CAP
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Open the hood, and remove the
engine oil fill cap. Remove the oil
drain bolt and washer from the
bottom of the engine. Drain the oil
into an appropriate container.
Your vehicle does not require any oil
additives. Additives may adversely
affect the engine or transmission
performance and durability.
You may use a synthetic motor oil if
it meets the same requirements
given for a conventional motor oil: it
displays the API Certification Seal,
and it is the proper weight. You must
follow the oil and filter change
intervals shown on the information
display.
Run the engine until it reaches
normal operating temperature,
then shut it off.
Changing the oil and filter requires
special tools and access from
underneath the vehicle. The vehicle
should be raised on a service station-
type hydraulic lift for this service.
Unless you have the knowledge and
proper equipment, you should have
this maintenance done by a skilled
mechanic.
Always change the oil and filter
according to the maintenance
messages shown on the odometer
and trip meter display. The oil and
filter collect contaminants that can
damage your engine if they are not
removed regularly.
1.
2.
CONTINUED
Synthetic Oil
Engine Oil Additives
Changing the Engine Oil and
Filter
Adding Engine Oil, Changing the Engine Oil and Filter
Maintenance
247
WASHER
DRAIN BOLT
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Remove the oil filter, and let the
remaining oil drain. A special
wrench (available from your
dealer) is required.
Turn off the engine and let it sit
for several minutes, then check
the oil level on the dipstick. If
necessary, add more oil.
Put a new washer on the drain bolt,
then reinstall the drain bolt.
Tighten the drain bolt to:
Refill the engine with the recom-
mended oil.
Engine oil change capacity
(including filter):
Let the engine run for several
minutes, then check the drain bolt
and oil filter for leaks.
Make sure the oil filter gasket is
not stuck to the engine block. If it
is, remove it before installing a
new oil filter.
Install a new oil filter according to
the instructions that come with it.
Reinstall the engine oil fill cap.
Start the engine. The oil pressure
indicator should go out within 5
seconds. If it does not, turn off the
engine, and check your work.
9.
8.
7.
6.
4.
5.
3.
Changing the Engine Oil and Filter
248
OIL FILTER
29 lbf·ft (39 N·m , 4.0 kgf·m)
4.5 US qt (4.3
)
Improper disposal of engine oil can be
harmful to the environment. If you
change your own oil, please dispose of
the used oil properly. Put it in a sealed
container, and take it to a recycling
center. Do not discard it in a trash bin
or dump it on the ground.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If the reserve tank is completely
empty, you should also check the
coolant level in the radiator.
If Honda antifreeze/coolant is not
available, you may use another
major-brand non-silicate coolant as a
temporaryreplacement.Makesureit
is a high-quality coolant
recommended for aluminum engines.
Continued use of any non-Honda
coolant can result in corrosion,
causing the cooling system to
malfunction or fail. Have the cooling
system flushed and refilled with
Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as
possible.
If the coolant level in the reserve
tank is at or below the MIN line, add
coolant to bring it up to the MAX line.
Inspect the cooling system for leaks.
Always use Honda Long-life Anti-
freeze/Coolant Type 2. This coolant
is pre-mixed with 50 percent
antifreeze and 50 percent water.
Never add straight antifreeze or
plain water.
CONTINUED
Adding Engine Coolant
Engine Coolant
Maintenance
249
RESERVE TANK
Removing the radiator cap
while the engine is hot can
cause the coolant to spray out,
seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and
radiator cool down before
removing the radiator cap.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Make sure the engine and radiator
are cool.
When the radiator and engine are
cool, relieve any pressure in the
cooling system by turning the
radiator cap counterclockwise,
without pressing down.
Remove the radiator cap by
pushing down and turning
counterclockwise.
The coolant level should be up to
the base of the filler neck. Add
coolant if it is low.
Pourthecoolantslowlyand
carefully so you do not spill any.
Clean up any spill immediately; it
could damage components in the
engine compartment.
Put the radiator cap back on, and
tighten it fully.
Pour coolant into the reserve tank.
Fill it to halfway between the MAX
and MIN marks. Put the cap back
on the reserve tank.
Do not add any rust inhibitors or
other additives to your vehicle’s
cooling system. They may not be
compatible with the coolant or
engine components.
Check the fluid level in the
windshield washer reservoir at least
monthly during normal use.
The washer level indicator will come
on when the level is low (see page
).
Fill the reservoir with a good-quality
windshield washer fluid. This
increases the cleaning capability and
prevents freezing in cold weather.
When you refill the reservoir, clean
the edges of the windshield wiper
blades with windshield washer fluid
on a clean cloth. This will help to
condition them.
3.
4.
5.
1.
2.
65
Windshield Washers
Engine Coolant, Windshield Washers
250
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
Check the fluid level with the engine
at normal operating temperature.
Park the vehicle on level ground.
Insert the dipstick all the way into
the transmission securely as
shown in the illustration.
Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)
from the transmission, and wipe it
with a clean cloth.
Remove the dipstick and check
the fluid level. It should be
between the upper and lower
marks.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Windshield Washers, Automatic Transmission Fluid
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Maintenance
251
DIPSTICK
DIPSTICK
UPPER MARK
LOWER MARK
Do not use engine antifreeze or a
vinegar/water solution in the
windshield washer reservoir. Antifreeze
can damage your vehicle’s paint, while
a vinegar/water solution can damage
the windshield washer pump. Use only
commercially-available windshield
washer fluid.
Start the engine and let it run until
the radiator fan comes on, then
shut off the engine. For accurate
results, wait about 60 seconds
wait longer than 90 seconds.
before going to step 2, but do not
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The rear differential should be
drained and refilled with new fluid
when this service is indicated by a
maintenance message on the
information display. This service
may be needed more often under
certain driving conditions (see page
).
Always use Honda VTM-4
Differential Fluid, and have your
dealer replace the rear differential
fluid.
Insert the dipstick all the way back
in the transmission.
If the level is below the lower
mark, remove the fill plug, then
add the fluid into the hole to bring
it to the level between the upper
and lower marks.
Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so
you do not spill any. Clean up any
spill immediately; it could damage
components in the engine
compartment.
Always use Honda ATF-Z1
(automatic transmission fluid). If it’s
not available, you may use a
DEXRON
III automatic
transmission fluid as a temporary
replacement. However, continued
use can affect the shift quality. Have
the transmission flushed and refilled
with Honda ATF-Z1 by your dealer
as soon as it is convenient.
If you are not sure how to add fluid,
contact your dealer.
6.5.
242
Automatic transmission Fluid, Rear Differential Fluid
Rear Differential Fluid
252
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The transfer assembly should be
drained and refilled with new fluid
when this service is indicated by a
maintenance message on the
information display.
Always use Hypoid gear oil GL4 or
GL5 with a viscosity of SAE 90 or
80W-90, and have your dealer
replace the transfer assembly fluid.
Check the brake fluid level in the
reservoir monthly.
Replace the brake fluid according to
the time recommendation in the
maintenance minder schedule.
Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not
compatible with your vehicle’s
braking system and can cause
extensive damage.
Using any non-Honda brake fluid can
cause corrosion and decrease the life
of the system. Have the brake
system flushed and refilled with
Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid
DOT 3 as soon as possible.
Always use Honda Heavy Duty
Brake Fluid DOT 3. If it is not
available, you should use only DOT 3
or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealed
container, as a temporary
replacement.
The fluid level should be between
theMINandMAXmarksontheside
of the reservoir. If the level is at or
below the MIN mark, your brake
system needs attention. Have the
brake system inspected for leaks or
worn brake pads.
Brake FluidTransfer Assembly Fluid
Transfer Assembly Fluid, Brake Fluid
Maintenance
253
MAX
MIN
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−−
The timing belt should be replaced
at the intervals shown in the
maintenance minder schedule.
Replace the belt at 60,000 miles (U.S.)
or 100,000 km (Canada) if you
regularly drive your vehicle in one or
more of these conditions:
Remove the cover, then check the
level on the side of the reservoir
when the engine is cold.
The fluid should be between the
UPPER LEVEL and LOWER LEVEL.
If not, add power steering fluid to the
UPPER LEVEL mark, and put the
cover back in place.
Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so
you do not spill any. Clean up any
spill immediately; it could damage
components in the engine
compartment.
A low power steering fluid level can
indicate a leak in the system. Check
the fluid level frequently, and have
the system inspected as soon as
possible.
Always use Honda Power Steering
Fluid. You may use another power
steering fluid as an emergency
replacement, but have the power
steering system flushed and refilled
with Honda PSF as soon as possible.
In very high temperatures
(over 110°F, 43°C).
In very low temperatures
(under 20°F, 29°C).
Towing a trailer.
Timing BeltPower Steering Fluid
Power Steering Fluid, Timing Belt
254
UPPER LEVEL
LOWER LEVEL
COVER
Turning the steering wheel to full left
or right lock and holding it there can
damage the power steering pump.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
Your vehicle has halogen headlight
bulbs. When replacing a bulb, handle
it by its base, and protect the glass
from contact with your skin or hard
objects. If you touch the glass, clean
it with denatured alcohol and a clean
cloth.
Remove the electrical connector
from the bulb by pulling the
connector straight back.
Remove the rubber weather seal
by pulling on the tab.
Unclip the end of the hold-down
wire from its slot. Pivot it out of
the way, and remove the bulb.
Theheadlightswereproperlyaimed
when your vehicle was new. If you
regularly carry heavy items on the
pickup bed or pull a trailer,
readjustment may be required.
Adjustmentsshouldbedonebyyour
dealer or other qualified mechanic.
1.
2.
3.
Headlight Aiming Replacing a Headlight Bulb
Lights
Maintenance
255
WEATHER SEAL
CONNECTOR HOLD-DOWN WIRE
BULB
Halogen headlight bulbs get very hot
when lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratch
on the glass can cause the bulb to
overheat and shatter.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Install the new bulb into the hole,
making sure the tabs are in their
slots. Pivot the hold-down wire
back in place, and clip the end into
the slot.
Install the rubber weather seal
over the back of the headlight
assembly.Makesureitisright
side up.
To change the passenger’s side
bulb, start the engine, turn the
steering wheel all the way to the
left, and turn off the engine. To
change the driver’s side bulb, turn
the steering wheel to the right.
Use a flat-tipped screwdriver to
remove the two holding clips from
the inner fender, and pull the inner
fender cover back.
Remove the socket from the
headlight assembly by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket. Push the new bulb straight
into the socket until it bottoms.
Push the electrical connector onto
the new bulb. Make sure it is
connected securely. Turn on the
headlights to test the new bulb.
4.
5.
6.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Lights
Replacing a Front Turn Signal/
Hazard/Parking Light Bulb
256
HOLDING CLIPS
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Remove the socket by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
Remove the burned-out bulb by
pulling it straight out of the socket.
Drop open the tailgate.
Remove the two bolts, and remove
the rear light assembly from the
rear pillar.
Determine which of the three
bulbs is burned out: brake/
taillight, turn signal/hazard light,
or back-up light.
Insert the socket back into the
headlight assembly. Turn it
clockwise to lock it in place.
Turn on the lights to make sure
the new bulb is working.
Put the inner fender cover in place.
Install and lock each holding clip
bypushingonthecenter.
1.
2.
3.
5.
4.
5.
6.
7.
CONTINUED
Lights
Replacing Rear Bulbs
Maintenance
257
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Install the new bulb into the
socket.
Push the socket into the light
assembly, and turn it clockwise
until it locks.
Turn on the lights to make sure
the new bulb is working.
Install the rear light assembly in
the rear pillar. Tighten the two
bolts securely.
Place a cloth on the edge of the
lens segment. Remove each lens
segment by carefully prying on its
edge with a small flat-tipped
screwdriver.
Remove the three mounting
screws from the light assembly.
Remove the screw under each lens.
Pull the high-mount brake light
assembly out of the vehicle.
Remove the lens from the light
assembly.
Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket. Push the new bulb straight
into the socket until it bottoms.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
6.
Lights
Replacing a High-mount Brake
Light Bulb
258
LENS SEGMENT
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Put the lens back on the light
assembly, and tighten the
mounting bolts securely.
Turn on the lights to make sure
the new bulb is working.
Put the light assembly back into
the vehicle. Install the screws and
tighten them securely.
Reinstall the lens segments.
Remove the license plate light
assembly by pulling it towards you,
and then pulling the front edge
upward.
Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket. Push the new bulb straight
into the socket until it bottoms.
Push the socket into the light
assembly, and turn it clockwise
until it locks.
Remove the socket from the light
assembly by turning it one-quarter
turn counterclockwise.
1.
2.
3.
4.
7.
8.
9.
CONTINUED
Lights
Replacing a Rear License Plate
Bulb
Maintenance
259
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket. Push the new bulb straight
into the socket until it bottoms.
Push the socket into the light
assembly, and turn it clockwise
until it locks.
Remove the mounting screw from
the bed light assembly.
Pull out the light assembly.
Remove the socket from the light
assembly by turning it one-quarter
turn counterclockwise.
Turn on the lights to make sure
the new bulb is working.
Reinstall the light assembly in the
bumper.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
5.
6.
Lights
Replacing a Bed Light Bulb
260
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Reinstall the light assembly.
Reinstall the mounting screw, and
tighten it securely.
Turn on the lights to make sure
the new bulb is working.
Dirt build-up in the loops of the seat
belt anchors can cause the belts to
retract slowly. Wipe the insides of
the loops with a clean cloth
dampened in mild soap and warm
water or isopropyl alcohol.
If your seat belts get dirty, use a soft
brush with a mixture of mild soap
and warm water to clean them. Do
not use bleach, dye, or cleaning
solvents. Let the belts air-dry before
you use the vehicle.
The floor mats that came with your
vehicle hook over floor mat anchors.
This keeps the floor mats from
sliding forward or backward and
possibly interfering with the pedals
or making the front passenger’s
weight sensors ineffective.
If you remove a floor mat, make sure
tore-anchoritwhenyouputitback
in your vehicle.
6.
7.
8.
CONTINUED
Cleaning the Seat Belts Floor Mats
Lights, Cleaning the Seat Belts, Floor Mats
Maintenance
261
LOOP
Main Menu
Table of Contents
A non-Honda floor mat may not fit
your vehicle properly. This could
prevent the proper operation of the
folding rear seats and the passenger’s
seat weight sensors. We recommend
using genuine Honda floor mats. Do
not put additional floor mats on top
of the anchored mats.
This filter removes the dust and
pollenthatisbroughtinfromthe
outside through the heating and
cooling system/climate control
system.
Have your dealer replace this filter
when this service is indicated by a
maintenance message on the
information display. It should be
replaced every 15,000 miles (24,000
km) if you drive primarily in urban
areas that have high concentrations
of soot in the air, or if the air flow
from the heating and cooling
system/climate control system
becomeslessthanusual.
Check the condition of the wiper
blades at least every six months.
Replace them if you find signs of
cracking in the rubber, areas that are
getting hard, or if they leave streaks
and unwiped areas when used.
To replace a wiper blade:
To raise the wiper arm, turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position and activate the wipers
(see page ). When the wipers
are in the upright position, turn
the ignition switch off to stop the
wipers in that position.
1.
75
Dust and Pollen Filter Wiper Blades
Floor Mats, Dust and Pollen Filter, Wiper Blades
262
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
Raise the wiper arm off the
windshield.
Disconnect the blade assembly
fromthewiperarmbypushingin
the lock tab. Hold the lock tab in
while you push the blade assembly
toward the base of the arm.
Remove the blade from its holder
by grabbing the tabbed end of the
blade. Pull up firmly until the tabs
come out of the holder.
2. 3. 4.
Wiper Blades
Maintenance
263
LOCK TAB
WIPER ARMS BLADE
Do not open the hood when the wiper
arms are raised, or you will damage the
hood and the wiper arms.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Examine the new wiper blades. If
they have no plastic or metal
reinforcement along the back
edge, remove the metal
reinforcement strips from the old
wiper blade, and install them in
the slots along the edge of the new
blade.
Slide the new wiper blade into the
holder until the tabs lock.
Slide the wiper blade assembly
onto the wiper arm. Make sure it
locks in place.
Lower the wiper arm against the
window.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position, and turn the wiper
switch off to return the wiper arms
to the parked position.
Aluminum alloy wheels have a
protective clear-coat that keeps
the aluminum from corroding and
tarnishing. Cleaning the wheels
with harsh chemicals (including
some commercial wheel cleaners)
or a stiff brush can damage the
clear-coat. To clean the wheels,
use a mild detergent and a soft
brush or sponge.
Clean the wheels as you would the
rest of the exterior. Wash them with
thesamesolution,andrinsethem
thoroughly.
6.
7.
5.
8.
9.
If equipped
Wheels
Wiper Blades, Wheels
264
BLADE
REINFORCEMENT
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To safely operate your vehicle, your
tires must be the proper type and
size, in good condition with adequate
tread, and correctly inflated.
Keeping the tires properly inflated
provides the best combination of
handling, tread life, and riding
comfort.
The following pages give more
detailed information on how to take
care of your tires and what to do
when they need to be replaced.
Underinflated tires wear unevenly,
adversely affect handling and fuel
economy, and are more likely to
fail from being overheated.
Overinflated tires can make your
vehicleridemoreharshly,are
more prone to damage from road
hazards, and wear unevenly.
Thetirepressuremonitoringsystem
(TPMS) warns you when a tire
pressure is low. See page for
more information.
Even though your vehicle is
equipped with TPMS, we
recommend that you visually check
your tires every day. If you think a
tire might be low, check it
immediately with a tire gauge.
Use a gauge to measure the air
pressure in each tire at least once a
month. Even tires that are in good
condition may lose 1 to 2 psi (10 to
20 kPa, 0.1 to 0.2 kgf/cm ) per
month. Remember to check the
sparetireatthesametime.
Check the air pressures when the
tires are cold. This means the
vehicle has been parked for at least 3
hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6
km). Add or release air, if needed, to
match the recommended cold tire
pressures on page .
204
266
CONTINUED
Inflation Guidelines
Tires
Maintenance
265
Using tires that are excessively
worn or improperly inflated can
cause a crash in which you can
be seriously hurt or killed.
Follow all instructions in this
owner’s manual regarding tire
inflation and maintenance.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Every time you check inflation, you
should also examine the tires for
damage, foreign objects, and wear.
Youshouldlookfor:
Bumps or bulges in the tread or
side of the tire. Replace the tire if
youfindeitheroftheseconditions.
Cuts, splits, or cracks in the side
of the tire. Replace the tire if you
can see fabric or cord.
Excessive tread wear.
If you check air pressures when the
tires are hot [driven for several miles
(kilometers)], you will see readings 4
to6psi(30to40kPa,0.3to0.4
kgf/cm ) higher than the cold
readings.Thisisnormal.Donotlet
air out to match the recommended
cold air pressure. The tire will be
underinflated.
For additional information about
your tires, see page .
For convenience, the recommended
tire sizes and cold tire pressures are
on a label on the driver’s doorjamb.
The following chart shows the
recommended cold tire pressures for
most normal and high-speed driving
conditions.
Never use a puncture-repairing agent
in a flat tire. If used, you will have to
replace the tire pressure sensor.
Havetheflattirerepairedbyyour
dealer as soon as possible.
Youshouldgetyourowntire
pressure gauge and use it whenever
you check your tire pressures. This
will make it easier for you to tell if a
pressure loss is due to a tire problem
and not due to a variation between
gauges.
While tubeless tires have some
ability to self-seal if they are
punctured, you should look closely
for punctures if a tire starts losing
pressure.
306
Tire Size Cold Tire Pressure
Compact Spare
Front/Rear:
Tires
Tire Inspection
Recommended Tire Pressures
266
P245/65R17 105S 32 psi (220 kPa ,
2.2 kgf/cm
)
60 psi (420 kPa ,
4.2 kgf/cm
)T165/90R17 105M
Main Menu
Table of Contents
In addition to proper inflation,
correct wheel alignment helps to
decrease tire wear. If you find a tire
is worn unevenly, have your dealer
check the wheel alignment.
Have your dealer check the tires if
you feel a consistent vibration while
driving. A tire should always be
rebalanced if it is removed from the
wheel. When you have new tires
installed, make sure they are
balanced. This increases riding
comfort and tire life. For best results,
have the installer perform a dynamic
balance.
Your tires have wear indicators
molded into the tread. When the
tread wears down, you will see a
band 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) wide band
across the tread. This shows there is
less than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread
left on the tire.
A tire this worn gives very little
traction on wet roads. You should
replace the tire if you can see three
or more tread wear indicators.
To help increase tire life and
distribute wear more evenly, rotate
the tires according to the
maintenance messages displayed on
the information display. Move the
tires to the positions shown in the
diagram each time they are rotated.
If you purchase directional tires,
rotate only front-to-back.
Tire Maintenance Tire Rotation
Tires
Maintenance
267
Front
(For Non-directional
Tires and Wheels)
Front
(For Directional
Tires and Wheels)
TREAD WEAR INDICATORS
INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS
On vehicles with aluminum wheels,
improper wheel weights can damage
your vehicle’s wheels. Use only Honda
wheel weights for balancing.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
It is best to replace all four tires at
thesametime.Ifthatisnotpossible
or necessary, replace the two front
tires or two rear tires as a pair.
Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling.
If you ever replace a wheel, make
sure that the wheel’s specifications
match those of the original wheels.
Replace your tires with radial tires of
the same size, load range, speed
rating, and maximum cold tire
pressure rating (as shown on the
tire’s sidewall).
Also be sure you use only TPMS
specific wheels. If you do not, the
tire pressure monitoring system will
notworkonthattire.
Mixing radial and bias-ply tires on
your vehicle can reduce braking
ability, traction, and steering
accuracy. Using tires of a different
size or construction can cause the
ABS and vehicle stability assist
system (VSA) to work inconsistently.
TheABSworksbycomparingthe
speed of the wheels. When replacing
tires, use the same size originally
supplied with the vehicle. Tire size
and construction can affect wheel
speed and may cause the system to
activate.
Replacement wheels are available at
your dealer.
Replacing Tires and Wheels
Tires
268
Installing improper tires on your
vehicle can affect handling and
stability. This can cause a crash
in which you can be seriously
hurt or killed.
Always use the size and type of
tires recommended in this
owner’s manual.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＃
＋
＊
＊
Wheels:
Tires:
Mount tire chains on your tires when
required by driving conditions or
local laws. Install them only on the
front tires. Do not use chains on the
rear tires.
Because your vehicle has limited tire
clearance, we strongly recommend
using this Quality Chain Corp. tire
chain:
See page for DOT tire quality
grading information, and page
for tire size information.
If you mount snow tires on your
vehicle, make sure they are radial
tires of the same size and load range
as the original tires. Mount snow tires
on all four wheels. The traction
provided by snow tires on dry roads
maybelowerthanyouroriginaltires.
Check with the tire dealer for
maximum speed recommendations.
Rubber chain adjusters, or
tensioners, must be used to
prevent the chains from
contacting the body or the chassis.
This tire chain is available at many
auto supply stores. To find a local
storethatcarriesthechain,call
Quality Chain Corp at 1-800-843-8824.
To order the tire chain online, go to
, and enter your
vehicle information. When you install
the chains, follow the manufacturer’s
instructions, and mount them as
tightly as you can. Drive slowly with
the chains installed.
Tires marked ‘‘M S’’ or ‘‘All
Season’’ on the sidewall have an all-
weather tread design suitable for
most winter driving conditions.
For the best performance in snowy
or icy conditions, you should install
snow tires or tire chains. They may
be required by local laws under
certain conditions.
304
306
www.chainquest.com
CONTINUED
Tires
Wheel and Tire Specifications Snow Tires
Tire Chains
Premium Cobra Cable Chain
1046P with accessory
adjusters
Winter Driving
Maintenance
269
17x71/2J
P245/65R17 105S
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Check the condition of the battery
monthlybylookingatthetest
indicator window. The label on the
battery explains the test indicator’s
colors.
If you ever hear the chains
contacting the body or chassis, stop
and investigate. If the chains have
loosened, retighten them. Make sure
they do not contact the brake lines
or suspension.
Removethechainsassoonasyou
begin driving on cleared roads.
Tires, Checking the Battery
Checking the Battery
270
TEST INDICATOR WINDOW
Using the wrong chains, or not
properly installing chains, can
damage the brake lines and
cause a crash in which you can
be seriously injured or killed.
Follow all instructions in this
owner’s manual regarding the
selection and use of tire chains.
Traction devices that are the wrong
size or improperly installed can
damage your vehicle’s brake lines,
suspension, body, and wheels. Stop
driving if they are hitting any part of
the vehicle.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected or goes dead, the audio
system will disable itself. The next
timeyouturnontheradioyouwill
see ‘‘CODE’’ in the frequency display.
Use the preset bars to enter the code
(see page ).
The navigation system will also
disableitself.Thenexttimeyouturn
on the ignition switch, the system
will require you to enter a PIN
before it can be used. Refer to the
navigation system manual.
If additional battery maintenance is
needed, see your dealer or a
qualified technician.
Battery posts,
terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds.
If you need to connect the battery to
a charger, disconnect both cables to
prevent damaging your vehicle’s
electrical system. Always disconnect
the negative ( ) cable first, and
reconnect it last.
Check the terminals for corrosion (a
white or yellowish powder). To
remove it, cover the terminals with a
solution of baking soda and water. It
will bubble up and turn brown. When
this stops, wash it off with plain
water. Dry off the battery with a
cloth or paper towel. Coat the
terminals with grease to help prevent
future corrosion.
162
On vehicles with navigation system
Checking the Battery
WARNING:
Wash your hands after handling.
Maintenance
271
The battery gives off explosive
hydrogen gas during normal
operation.
A spark or flame can cause the
battery to explode with enough
force to kill or seriously hurt you.
Wear protective clothing and a
face shield, or have a skilled
technician do the battery
maintenance.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you need to park your vehicle for
an extended period (more than 1
month), there are several things you
should do to prepare it for storage.
Proper preparation helps prevent
deterioration and makes it easier to
get your vehicle back on the road. If
possible, store your vehicle indoors.
Fill the fuel tank.
Change the engine oil and filter.
Wash and dry the exterior
completely.
Cleantheinterior.Makesurethe
carpeting, floor mats, etc., are
completely dry.
Leave the parking brake off. Put
the transmission in Park.
Block the rear wheels.
If the vehicle is to be stored for a
longer period, it should be
supported on jackstands so the
tires are off the ground.
Leave one window open slightly (if
the vehicle is being stored
indoors).
Disconnect the battery.
Cover the vehicle with a
‘‘breathable’’ cover, one made
from a porous material such as
cotton. Non-porous materials, such
as plastic sheeting, trap moisture,
which can damage the paint.
If possible, periodically run the
engine until it reaches full
operating temperature (the
cooling fans cycle on and off
twice). Preferably, do this once a
month.
Support the front wiper blade
arms with a folded towel or rag so
they do not touch the windshield.
To minimize sticking, apply a
silicone spray lubricant to all door,
In-Bed Trunk lid, and tailgate seals.
Also,applyavehiclebodywaxto
the painted surfaces that mate
with the door, In-Bed Trunk lid
and tailgate seals.
Vehicle Storage
272
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This section covers the more
common problems that motorists
experience with their vehicles. It
gives you information about how to
safely evaluate the problem and what
to do to correct it. If the problem has
stranded you on the side of the road,
you may be able to get going again.
If not, you will also find instructions
on getting your vehicle towed.
......................Compact Spare Tire . 274
....................Changing a Flat Tire . 275
.............If the Engine Won’t Start . 283
................................Jump Starting . 284
..............If the Engine Overheats . 286
.........Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 288
..........Charging System Indicator . 288
.......Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 289
...............Brake System Indicator . 290
..............................................Fuses . 291
..............................Fuse Locations . 294
......................Emergency Towing . 296
..........If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck . 297
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Taking Care of the Unexpected
273
Main Menu
Use the compact spare tire as a
temporary replacement only. Get
your regular tire repaired or replaced,
and put it back on your vehicle as
soon as you can.
Check the inflation pressure of the
compact spare tire every time you
check the other tires. It should be
inflated to:
Follow these precautions:
Do not mount snow chains on a
compact spare.
Do not use the compact spare tire
if you are towing a trailer.
Do not use your compact spare
tire on another vehicle unless it is
thesamemakeandmodel.
Replace the tire when you can see
the tread wear indicator bars. The
replacement should be the same size
and design tire, mounted on the
same wheel. The spare tire is not
designed to be mounted on a regular
wheel, and the spare wheel is not
designed for mounting a regular tire.
Never exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
This tire gives a harsher ride and
less traction on some road
surfaces. Use greater caution
while driving.
Driving with the compact spare
tiremayactivatetheTPMS(see
page ). The TPMS does not
monitor compact spare tire
pressure.
205
Compact Spare Tire
274
INDICATOR LOCATION MARK
TREAD WEAR INDICATOR BAR
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Turn on the hazard warning lights,
and turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position. Have all
passengers get out of the vehicle
while you change the tire.
Park the vehicle on firm, level, and
non-slippery ground. Put the
transmission in Park. Apply the
parking brake.
If you are towing a trailer, unhitch
it.
If you have a flat tire while driving,
stop in a safe place to change it.
Drive slowly along the shoulder until
you get to an exit or an area to stop
that is far away from the traffic lanes.
If you tow a trailer frequently, we
recommend that you use a regular
tire as a spare. You can store the
regular size spare tire on the tire tray,
but store the tool kit at the side of
the In-Bed Trunk (see page ),
and secure it.
2.1.
281
CONTINUED
Changing a Flat Tire
Taking Care of the Unexpected
275
TOOL BOX
SPARE TIRE
The vehicle can easily roll off
the jack, seriously injuring
anyone underneath.
Follow the directions for
changing a tire exactly, and
never get under the vehicle
when it is supported only by the
jack.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Open the In-Bed Trunk.
Remove the two tire tray holding
bolts.
Pull out the tire tray with the
handle, and hook the rear of the
tire tray to the guides on the back
edge of the In-Bed Trunk.
Unfasten the strap to remove the
tool box, and unscrew the wing
bolt.
Takeoutthecompactsparetire.
If you are using a cargo net or a
cargo cover in the In-Bed Trunk,
remove it before pulling out the tire
tray.
4.
3. 5. 6.
7.
Changing a Flat Tire
276
TIRE TRAY HOLDING BOLTS
WING BOLT
TOOL BOX
TIRE
TRAY
STRAP
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
Loosen each wheel nut 1/2 turn
with the wheel nut wrench.
Place the jack under the jacking
point nearest the tire you need to
change.
Turn the dial at the bottom of the
jack clockwise until the top of the
jack contacts the jacking point.
Make sure the jacking point tab is
restinginthejacknotch.
8. 9. 10.
Changing a Flat Tire
Taking Care of the Unexpected
277
JACKING POINT DIAL
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Attach the stay to the extension,
then attach the wheel nut wrench
to the end of the extension.
Turn the jack dial (wheel nut
wrench) clockwise as shown to
raise the vehicle until the flat tire
is off the ground.
Make sure the stay, the extension,
and the wheel nut wrench are
securely attached.
Insert the hook at the end of the
stay into the opening on the dial at
the bottom of the jack.
11. 12. 13.
Changing a Flat Tire
278
EXTENSION
CONNECTOR BUTTON
DIAL
CONNECTOR BUTTON WHEEL NUT WRENCH
HOOK
STAY
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
Put on the spare tire. Put the
wheel nuts back on finger-tight,
then tighten them in a crisscross
pattern with the wheel nut wrench
until the wheel is firmly against
the hub. Do not try to tighten the
wheel nuts fully.
Lower the vehicle to the ground,
and remove the jack.
Remove the wheel nuts and the
wheel cap (on RT and Canadian
LX models) then remove the flat
tire. Handle the wheel nuts
carefully; they may be hot from
driving. Place the flat tire on the
ground with the outside surface
facing up.
Before mounting the spare tire,
wipeanydirtoffthemounting
surface of the wheel and hub with
a clean cloth. Wipe the hub
carefully;itmaybehotfrom
driving.
The wheel cap cannot be removed
without first removing the wheel
nuts.
14. 15.
16.
17.
On RT and Canadian LX models
Changing a Flat Tire
Taking Care of the Unexpected
279
BRAKE HUB
WHEEL CAP
RT/LX model is shown.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Tighten the wheel nuts securely in
the same crisscross pattern. Have
the wheel nut torque checked at
the nearest automotive service
facility.
Tighten the wheel nuts to:
Place the flat tire face up on the
tire tray.
Remove the spacer cone from the
wing bolt, turn it over, and put it
back on the bolt.
Securetheflattirebyscrewing
the wing bolt back into its hole.
Release the tire tray and slide it
back in place.
Tighten the tire tray holding bolts
securely.
Remove the center cap from the
flat tire.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
On RTX, RTS, RTL, and Canadian
EXL models
Changing a Flat Tire
280
WING BOLT
SPACER CONE
For normal
tire
For spare
tire
94 lbf·ft (127 N·m , 13 kgf·m)
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Store the wheel cap or center cap
in the In-Bed Trunk. Make sure it
does not get scratched or
damaged.
Refer to
(see page ).
When storing the flat tire, place
the tool box at the right side of the
In-Bed Trunk as shown.
Store the jack and the tools in the
tool box.
25.
26.
27.
28.
205
Changing a Tire with
TPMS
Changing a Flat Tire
Taking Care of the Unexpected
281
TOOL BOX
Loose items can be thrown out
of the vehicle in a crash and
could seriously injure the
occupants.
Store the wheel, jack, and tools
securely before driving.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
As a temporary mounting location,
you can secure a spare tire on the
pickup bed, if needed.
Placethesparetireonthepickup
bed as shown.
Place the spacer cone in the wheel
hub,andsecurethesparetireto
the pickup bed with the wing bolt.
Ifyouremovethesparetirefromthe
pickup bed, reinstall the clip back
into its hole.
Remove the clip by pushing the
center of its top.
Remove the spare tire from the
tire tray (see page ).
Store or secure the tool box.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
276
Changing a Flat Tire
Securing a Spare Tire on the
Pickup Bed
282
SPACER CONE
WING BOLT
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Diagnosing why the engine won’t
start falls into two areas, depending
on what you hear when you turn the
ignition switch to the START (III)
position:
Check the transmission interlock.
The transmission must be in Park
or neutral or the starter will not
operate.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position. Turn on the
headlights, and check their
brightness. If the headlights are
very dim or do not come on at all,
the battery is discharged. See
on page .
If the headlights dim noticeably or
go out when you try to start the
engine, either the battery is
discharged or the connections are
corroded. Check the condition of
the battery and terminal connec-
tions (see page ). You can
then try jump starting the vehicle
from a booster battery (see page
).
In this case, the starter motor’s
speed sounds normal, or even faster
than normal, when you turn the
ignition switch to the START (III)
position, but the engine does not run.
Are you using a properly coded
key? An improperly coded key will
cause the immobilizer system
indicator in the instrument panel
to blink rapidly (see page ).
Turn the ignition switch to the
START (III) position. If the
headlights do not dim, check the
condition of the fuses. If the fuses
areOK,thereisprobably
something wrong with the
electrical circuit for the ignition
switch or starter motor. You will
need a qualified technician to
determine the problem. See
on page .
Check these things:
When you turn the ignition switch to
the START (III) position, you do not
hear the normal noise of the engine
trying to start. You may hear a
clicking sound, a series of clicks, or
nothing at all.
You can hear the starter motor
operating normally, or the starter
motor sounds like it is spinning
faster than normal, but the engine
does not start up and run.
You hear nothing, or almost
nothing. The engine’s starter
motor does not operate at all, or
operates very slowly.
81
284
296
270
284
CONTINUED
Jump Starting The Starter Operates Normally
Emergency Towing
Nothing Happens or the Starter
Motor Operates Very Slowly
IftheEngineWon’tStart
Taking Care of the Unexpected
283
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Are you using the proper starting
procedure? Refer to
on page .
There may be an electrical
problem, such as no power to the
fuel pump. Check all the fuses
(see page ).
Ifyoufindnothingwrong,youwill
need a qualified technician to find
the problem. See
on page .
Although this seems like a simple
procedure, you should take several
precautions.
You cannot start your vehicle by
pushing or pulling it.
Do you have fuel? Check the fuel
gauge; the low fuel indicator may
not be working.
Turn off all electrical accessories:
heater, A/C, climate control, audio
system, lights, etc. Put the
transmission in Park, and set the
parking brake.
Open the hood, and check the
physical condition of the battery.
In very cold weather, check the
condition of the electrolyte. If it
seems slushy or frozen, do not try
jump starting until it thaws.
1.
2.
196
291
296
Starting the
Engine
Emergency
Towing
Jump Starting
If the Engine Won’t Start, Jump Starting
To Jump Start Your Vehicle:
284
A battery can explode if you do
not follow the correct procedure,
seriously injuring anyone
nearby.
Keep all sparks, open flames,
and smoking materials away
from the battery.
If a battery sits in extreme cold, the
electrolyte inside can freeze.
Attempting to jump start with a frozen
battery can cause it to rupture.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
＋
＋
If the booster battery is in another
vehicle, have an assistant start
that vehicle and run it at a fast idle.
Start the vehicle. If the starter
motor still operates slowly, check
that the jumper cables have good
metal-to-metal contact.
Keep the ends of the jumper cables
away from each other and any metal
on the vehicle until everything is
disconnected. Otherwise, you may
cause an electrical short.
Connect the second jumper cable
to the negative ( ) terminal on
the booster battery. Connect the
other end to the grounding strap
as shown. Do not connect this
jumper cable to any other part of
the engine.
Connect one jumper cable to the
positive ( ) terminal on your
vehicle’s battery. Connect the
other end to the positive ( )
terminal on the booster battery.
The numbers in the illustration show
you the order to connect the jumper
cables.
Once your vehicle is running,
disconnect the negative cable from
your vehicle, then from the
booster battery. Disconnect the
positive cable from your vehicle,
then from the booster battery.
4.
6.
7.
5.
3.
Jump Starting
Taking Care of the Unexpected
285
BOOSTER
BATTERY
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you see steam and/or spray
coming from under the hood, turn
off the engine. Wait until you see
no more signs of steam or spray,
then open the hood.
If you do not see steam or spray,
leave the engine running, and
watch the temperature gauge. If
the high heat is due to overloading,
the engine should start to cool
down almost immediately. If it
does, wait until the temperature
gauge comes down to the midpoint,
then continue driving.
Safely pull to the side of the road.
Put the transmission in Park, and
set the parking brake. Turn off all
accessories, and turn on the
hazard warning indicators.
The pointer of your vehicle’s
temperature gauge should stay in
the midrange under most conditions.
If it climbs to the red mark, you
should determine the reason (hot
day, driving up a steep hill, etc.).
If the vehicle overheats, you should
take immediate action. The only
indication may be the temperature
gauge climbing to or above the red
mark. Or you may see steam or
spray coming from under the hood.
1.
2.
3.
IftheEngineOverheats
286
Steam and spray from an
overheated engine can
seriously scald you.
Do not open the hood if steam
is coming out.
Driving with the temperature gauge
pointer at the red mark can cause
serious damage to the engine.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If the temperature gauge stays at
the red mark, turn off the engine.
Look for any obvious coolant leaks,
such as a split radiator hose.
Everything is still extremely hot,
so use caution. If you find a leak, it
must be repaired before you
continue driving (see
on page ).
Put the radiator cap back on
tightly. Run the engine, and watch
the temperature gauge. If it goes
back to the red mark, the engine
needs repair (see
on page ).
If the temperature stays normal,
check the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank. If it has
gone down, add coolant to the
MAX mark. Put the cap back on
tightly.
If you do not find an obvious leak,
check the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank. Add coolant
if the level is below the MIN mark.
If there was no coolant in the
reserve tank, you may need to add
coolant to the radiator. Let the
engine cool down until the pointer
reaches the middle of the tempera-
ture gauge, or lower, before check-
ing the radiator.
Using gloves or a large heavy
cloth, turn the radiator cap
counterclockwise, without pushing
down, to the first stop. After the
pressure releases, push down on
the cap, and turn it until it comes
off.
Start the engine, and set the
temperature to maximum heat
(climate control to AUTO at
‘‘ ’’). Add coolant to the
radiator up to the base of the filler
neck. If you do not have the
proper coolant mixture available,
you can add plain water.
Remember to have the cooling
system drained and refilled with
the proper mixture as soon as you
can.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
10.
11.
9.
296
296
Emergency
Towing
Emergency
Towing
IftheEngineOverheats
Taking Care of the Unexpected
287
Removing the radiator cap
while the engine is hot can
cause the coolant to spray out,
seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and
radiator cool down before
removing the radiator cap.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Safely pull off the road, and shut
off the engine. Turn on the hazard
warning indicators.
Let the vehicle sit for a minute.
Open the hood, and check the oil
level (see page ). An engine
very low on oil can lose pressure
during cornering and other driving
maneuvers.
If necessary, add oil to bring the
level back to the full mark on the
dipstick (see page ).
If the charging system
indicator comes on brightly
when the engine is running, the
battery is not being charged.
Immediately turn off all electrical
accessories. Try not to use other
electrically operated controls such as
the power windows. Keep the engine
running; starting the engine will
discharge the battery rapidly.
This indicator should never
come on when the engine is
running. If it starts flashing or stays
on, the oil pressure has dropped very
low or lost pressure. Serious engine
damage is possible, and you should
take immediate action.
Start the engine, and watch the oil
pressure indicator. If it does not go
out within 10 seconds, turn off the
engine. There is a mechanical
problem that needs to be repaired
before you can continue driving
(see on page
).
Go to a service station or garage
where you can get technical
assistance.
1.
2.
3.
4.
182
246
296
Low Oil Pressure Indicator Charging System Indicator
Emergency Towing
Low Oil Pressure Indicator, Charging System Indicator
288
Running the engine with low oil
pressure can cause serious mechanical
damage almost immediately. Turn off
the engine as soon as you can safely get
the vehicle stopped.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If the indicator comes on repeatedly,
even though it may turn off as you
continue driving, have the vehicle
checked by your dealer as soon as
possible.
Your vehicle has certain ‘‘readiness
codes’’ that are part of the on-board
diagnostics for the emissions
systems. In some states, part of the
emissions testing is to make sure
these codes are set. If they are not
set, the test cannot be completed.
If this indicator comes on
while driving, it means one
of the engine’s emissions control
systems may have a problem. Even
though you may feel no difference in
your vehicle’s performance, it can
reduce your fuel economy and cause
increased emissions. Continued
operation may cause serious damage.
If you have recently refueled your
vehicle, the indicator could come on
due to a loose or missing fuel fill cap.
You will also see a ‘‘TIGHTEN FUEL
CAP’’ message on the information
display. Tighten the cap until it clicks
at least once. Tightening the cap will
not turn the indicator turn off
immediately; it can take several days
of normal driving.
The indicator may also come on with
the ‘‘D’’ indicator.
If the battery in your vehicle has
been disconnected or gone dead,
these codes are erased. It can take
several days of driving under various
conditions to set the codes again.
To check if they are set, turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position, without starting the engine.
The malfunction indicator lamp will
come on for 20 seconds. If it then
goes off, the readiness codes are set.
If it blinks five times, the readiness
codes are not set. If possible, do not
take your vehicle for a state
emissions test until the readiness
codes are set. Refer to
for more
information (see page ).
310
Readiness Codes
State
Emissions Testing
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Taking Care of the Unexpected
289
If you keep driving with the
malfunction indicator lamp on, you can
damage your vehicle’s emissions
controls and engine. Those repairs may
not be covered by your vehicle’s
warranties.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
However, if the brake pedal does not
feel normal, you should take
immediate action. A problem in one
part of the system’s dual circuit
design will still give you braking at
two wheels. You will feel the brake
pedal go down much farther before
the vehicle begins to slow down, and
you will have to press harder on the
pedal.
Slow down by shifting to a lower
gear, and pull to the side of the road
when it is safe. Because of the long
distance needed to stop, it is
hazardous to drive the vehicle. You
should have it towed, and repaired as
soon as possible. (See
on page .)
If you must drive the vehicle a short
distance in this condition, drive
slowly and carefully.
The brake system
indicator normally
comes on when
you turn the ignition switch to the
ON (II) position, and as a reminder
to check the parking brake. It will
stay on if you do not fully release the
parking brake.
If the brake system indicator comes
on while driving, the brake fluid level
is probably low. Press lightly on the
brake pedal to see if it feels normal.
If it does, check the brake fluid level
thenexttimeyoustopataservice
station (see page ).
If the ABS indicator and the VSA
system indicator come on with the
brake system indicator, have your
vehicle inspected by your dealer
immediately.
If the fluid level is low, take your
vehicle to a dealer, and have the
brake system inspected for leaks or
worn brake pads.
253
296
Emergency
Towing
Brake System Indicator
290
CanadaU.S.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The vehicle’s fuses are contained in
threefuseboxes.
The primary under-hood fuse box is
on the passenger’s side. The
secondary fuse box is next to the
brake fluid reservoir. To open them,
pushthetabsasshown.
The interior fuse box is on the
driver’s lower left side. To remove
the fuse box lid, put your finger in
the notch on the lid, and pull it
outward slightly, then pull it toward
you and take it out of its hinges.
If something electrical in your
vehicle stops working, check for a
blown fuse first. Determine from the
chart on pages and , or the
diagram on the fuse box lid, which
fuse or fuses control that device.
Check those fuses first, but check all
the fuses before deciding that a
blown fuse is the cause. Replace any
blown fuses, and check if the device
works.
294 295
CONTINUED
Checking and Replacing Fuses
Fuses
Taking Care of the Unexpected
291
UNDER-HOOD (SECONDARY)UNDER-HOOD (PRIMARY)INTERIOR
NOTCH
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Check the smaller fuses in the
under-hood fuse boxes and all the
fuses in the interior fuse box by
pulling out each one with the fuse
puller provided in the primary
under-hood fuse box.
Turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position. Make sure the
headlights and all other
accessories are off.
Check each of the large fuses in
the primary under-hood fuse box
by looking through the side
window at the wire inside.
Removing these fuses requires a
Phillips-head screwdriver.Remove the cover from the fuse
box.
4.3.1.
2
Fuses
292
BLOWN
FUSE PULLER
BLOWN
FUSE
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If the driver’s power window fuse is
removed, the AUTO function of the
driver’s window will be disabled. To
reset the AUTO function, see page
.
If you cannot drive the vehicle
without fixing the problem, and you
do not have a spare fuse, take a fuse
of the same rating or a lower rating
from one of the other circuits. Make
sureyoucandowithoutthatcircuit
temporarily (such as the accessory
power socket or radio).
If you replace the blown fuse with a
spare fuse that has a lower rating, it
might blow out again. This does not
indicate anything wrong. Replace the
fuse with one of the correct rating as
soon as you can.
Look for a blown wire inside the
fuse.Ifitisblown,replacethefuse
withoneofthesparefusesofthe
same rating or lower.
If the radio fuse is removed, the
audio system will disable itself. The
nexttimeyouturnontheradioyou
will see ‘‘CODE’’ in the frequency
display. Use the preset bars to enter
thecode(seepage ).
If the replacement fuse of the
same rating blows in a short time,
there is probably a serious
electrical problem in your vehicle.
Leave the blown fuse in that
circuit and have your vehicle
checked by a qualified technician.
5.
6.
106
162
Fuses
Taking Care of the Unexpected
293
BLOWN
Replacing a fuse with one that has a
higher rating greatly increases the
chances of damaging the electrical
system. If you do not have a
replacement fuse with the proper
rating for the circuit, install one with
a lower rating.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
＋
−
−
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
If equipped
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
1
2
3
4
5
6
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
If equipped
7
8
9
10
11
10 A
10 A
15 A
10 A
10 A
7.5 A
15 A
15 A
15 A
7.5 A
Horn, Stop
Defroster
Back Up, ACC
Hazard
Option 1
Not Used
Cooling Fan
Condenser Fan
Heater Motor
Seat
Battery
BIGIMain
Power Window
Spare Fuses
20 A
20 A
40 A
15 A
40 A
30 A
30 A
40 A
40 A
120 A
50 A
50 A
(7.5 A)
20 A
40 A
20 A
15 A
(20 A)
(20 A)
(7.5 A)
(20 A)
7.5 A
(20 A)
Back Light
VSA FSR
VSA MTR
VTM-4
Front Accessory Sockets
Electric Brake
Small Lights
Stop/Turn Lights
Charge
TPMS
Moonroof
Left Headlight Low Beam
Not Used
Left Headlight High Beam
Small Lights
Right Headlight High Beam
Right Headlight Low Beam
Back Up
FI ECU (PCM)
DBW
Not Used
Heated Seat
MG Clutch
:
:
No.
No.
No.
No.
Amps. Circuits ProtectedAmps.
Amps. Amps.Circuits Protected Circuits Protected
Circuits Protected
24 28
Fuse Locations
294
PRIMARY UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX
SECONDARY UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−−
−
−
＊
＊＊
＊
＊＊
＊＊
＊＊
No. No. Amps.Amps. Circuits Protected Circuits Protected
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
If equipped
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
15 A
15 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
10 A
7.5 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
(7.5 A)
7.5 A
15 A
(10 A)
15 A
20 A
10 A
7.5 A
20 A
10 A
7.5 A
30 A
(10 A)
(20 A)
(20 A)
Bed Lights
IG Coil
Daytime Running Light
LAF
Radio
Interior Lights
Back Up
Door Lock
Rear Accessory Socket
OPDS
IG, Wiper
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
IG ACG
IG Fuel Pump
IG Washer
IG Meter
IG SRS
IGP
Left Rear Window
Right Rear Window
Passenger’s Window
Back Window
Driver’s Window
Not Used
IG HAC
IG VSA/ABS
ACC
Not Used
:
:
Canadian models
Driver’s Power Seat Lumbar
Driver’s Power Seat Sliding
Driver’s Power Seat Reclining
Fuse Locations
Taking Care of the Unexpected
295
INTERIOR FUSE BOX
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If, due to damage, your vehicle must
be towed with all four wheels on the
ground, do the following:
Release the parking brake.
Start the engine.
Shift to D for several seconds,
then to N.
Turn off the engine.
With all four wheels on the ground,
it is best to tow the vehicle no farther
than 50 miles (80 km), and keep the
speedbelow35mph(55km/h).
If your vehicle needs to be towed,
call a professional towing service or
organization. Never tow your vehicle
with just a rope or chain. It is very
dangerous.
The operator will load
your vehicle on the back of a truck.
Any other method of towing will
damage the drive system. When you
contact the towing agency, inform
them a flat-bed is required.
Emergency Towing
The only way you can safely tow
your vehicle is with flat-bed
equipment.
296
Improper towing preparation will
damage the transmission. Follow the
above procedure exactly. If you cannot
shift the transmission or start the
engine, your vehicle must be
transported with the all four wheels off
the ground.
The steering system can be damaged if
the steering wheel is locked. Leave the
ignition switch in the ACCESSORY (I)
position, and make sure the steering
wheel turns freely before you begin
towing.
Towing your vehicle with two tires on
the ground will damage parts of the
4WD system. It should be transported
on a flat-bed truck or trailer.
Trying to lift or tow your vehicle by the
bumpers will cause serious damage.
The bumpers are not designed to
support the vehicle’s weight.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If your vehicle gets stuck in sand,
mud, or snow, call a towing service
to pull it out (see the previous page).
For very short distances, such as
freeing the vehicle, you can use the
tie down hooks on the lower left of
the front and rear bumpers.
CONTINUED
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck
Taking Care of the Unexpected
297
FRONT
REAR
TIE DOWN
HOOK
TIE DOWN
HOOK
‘‘Rocking’’ your vehicle between
forward and reverse gear or revving up
the engine and allowing the wheels to
spin freely at high speeds can damage
the automatic transmission. Use a tow
service to prevent transmission damage.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck
298
To avoid damage to your vehicle, use
the tie down hooks for straight, flat
ground towing only. Do not tow at an
angle. These hooks should not be used
for open-road towing.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Thediagramsinthissectiongive
you the dimensions and capacities of
your vehicle and the locations of the
identification numbers. It also
includes information you should
know about your vehicle’s tires and
emissions control systems.
................Identification Numbers . 300
................................Specifications . 302
DOT Tire Quality Grading
......................(U.S. Vehicles) . 304
Uniform Tire Quality
..................................Grading . 304
.................................Treadwear . 304
......................................Traction . 304
.............................Temperature . 305
.................................Tire Labeling . 306
.......................Emissions Controls . 307
.....................The Clean Air Act . 307
Crankcase Emissions Control
....................................System . 307
Evaporative Emissions Control
....................................System . 307
Onboard Refueling Vapor
................................Recovery . 307
...Exhaust Emissions Controls . 308
....................PGM-FI System . 308
Ignition Timing Control
................................System . 308
Exhaust Gas Recirculation
...................(EGR) System . 308
Three Way Catalytic
...........................Converter . 308
....................Replacement Parts . 308
..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 309
..............State Emissions Testing . 310
Technical Information
Technical Information
299
Main Menu
Your vehicle has several identifying
numbers in various places.
The vehicle identification number
(VIN) is the 17-digit number your
dealer uses to register your vehicle
for warranty purposes. It is also
necessary for licensing and insuring
your vehicle. The easiest place to
find the VIN is on a plate fastened to
the top of the dashboard. You can
seeitbylookingthroughthe
windshield on the driver’s side. It is
also on the certification label
attached to the driver’s doorjamb,
and is stamped on the engine
compartment bulkhead. The VIN is
also provided in bar code on the
certification label.
Identification Numbers
300
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
CERTIFICATION LABEL
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The engine number is stamped into
the engine block. It is on the front.
The transmission number is on a
label on top of the transmission.
Identification Numbers
Technical Information
301
ENGINE NUMBER
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NUMBER
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
−−
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
Specifications
302
CapacitiesDimensions
Weights
Air Conditioning
1.64 US gal (6.2 )
2.14 US gal (8.1 )
4.5 US qt (4.3 )
4.2 US qt (4.0 )
5.3 US qt (5.0 )
3.3 US qt (3.1 )
8.5 US qt (8.0
)
206.7 in (5,250 mm)
78.0 in (1,980 mm)
70.3 in (1,785 mm)
2.79 US qt (2.64
)
3.01 US qt (2.85
)
0.45 US qt (0.43
)
0.48 US qt (0.45
)
0.16 US gal (0.6 )
4.8 US qt (4.5 )
Excluding the oil remaining in the engine
Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in the
engine
Reserve tank capacity:
Fuel tank
Engine
coolant
Engine oil
Automatic
transmission
fluid
Rear
differential
fluid
Transfer
assembly
fluid
Windshield
washer
reservoir
Length
Width
Height
Wheelbase
Track
122.0 in (3,100 mm)
67.1 in (1,705 mm)
66.9 in (1,700 mm)
22.01 US gal (83.3
)
See the tire information label
attached to the driver’s doorjamb.
Gross vehicle weight rating
Gross combined weight
rating (GCWR)
Maximum load limit
(Payload)
The GCWR must be reduced 2 percent for every 1,000 feet (305
meters) of elevation.
Refrigerant type
Charge quantity
Lubricant type
HFC-134a (R-134a)
21.2 22.9 oz (600 650 g)
ND-OIL8
Approx.
Front
Rear
1:
2:
Change
Total
Change
Including
filter
Without
filter
Total
Change
Total
Change
Total
Change
Total
10,088 lbs (4,575 kg)
1:
2:
3:
On vehicles without moonroof or navigation system
1,530 lbs (690 kg)
1,480 lbs (670 kg)
On vehicles with moonroof and navigation system
1
1
2
2
3
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
Specifications
Technical Inf ormation
303
Fuses
Battery
Engine
Alignment
Tires
Lights
60/55 W (HB2)12 V
12 V 28/8 W
12 V 21 W
12 V 21/5 W
12 V 18 W
12 V 3 CP
12 V 3 CP
12 V
12 V
8W
5W
12 V 3 CP
12 V 1.4 W
Interior
Under-hood
Capacity
12 V
12 V
3.8 W
2W
12 V 3.4 W
Type
BorexStroke
Displacement
Compression ratio
Spark plugs
Toe-in
Camber
Caster
Size
Pressure
3.50 x 3.66 in (89.0 x 93.0 mm)
211.8 cu-in (3,471 cm )
10.0 : 1
IZFR5K-11
SKJ16DR-M11
0.00 in (0.0 mm)
0.00 in (0.0 mm)
0°50’
0°50’
1°53’
P245/65R17 105S
T165/90R17 105M
32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm
)
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
Headlights
Front turn signal/Parking/
Hazard lights
Rear turn signal/hazard lights
Brake/Taillights
Back-up lights
License plate lights
High-mount brake lights
Individual map lights
Bed lights
Console compartment light
Glove box light
Vanity mirror light
Door courtesy lights
12 V 72 AH/20 HR
12 V 60 AH/5 HR
See page 295 or the fuse label
attached to the inside of the fuse
box lid under the dashboard.
See page 294 or the fuse box lid.
Front/Rear
Spare
Front/Rear
Spare
Front
Rear
Front
Rear
Front
Front
Rear
NGK:
DENSO:
High/Low
Water cooled 4-stroke SOHC VTEC,
V6 gasoline engine
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−The tires on your vehicle meet all
U.S. Federal Safety Requirements.
All tires are also graded for
treadwear, traction, and temperature
performance according to
Department of Transportation
(DOT) standards. The following
explains these gradings.
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall
between the tread shoulder and the
maximum section width. For
example:
The treadwear grade is a compara-
tive rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government
test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and one-
half (1 1/2) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of
tires depends upon the actual condi-
tions of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits,
service practices, and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those
grades represent the tire’s ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on
specified government test surfaces
of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction
performance.
Warning: The traction grade
assignedtothistireisbasedon
straight-ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
traction characteristics.
All passenger car tires must conform
to Federal Safety Requirements in
addition to these grades.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Treadwear 200
Traction AA
Temperature A
Treadwear Traction AA, A, B, C
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
304
Main Menu
Table of Contents
− Warning: The temperature grade for
this tire is established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading,
either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible
tire failure.
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat, and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high
temperature can cause the material
of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessive temperature
can lead to sudden tire failure. The
Grade C corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No.
109. Grades B and A represent
higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
Temperature A,B,C
Technical Information
305
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
The tires that came on your vehicle
have a number of markings. Those
you should be aware of are described
below.
Rim diameter in inches.
Load index (a numerical code
associated with the maximum
load the tire can carry).
Speed symbol (an
alphabetical code indicating
the maximum speed rating).
The tire identification number (TIN)
is a group of numbers and letters
that look like the following example
TIN. TIN is located on the sidewall
of the tire.
Tire construction code (R
indicates radial).
Aspect ratio (the tire’s section
height as a percentage of its
width).
Tire width in millimeters.
Vehicletype(Pindicates
passenger vehicle).
Tire type code.
Date of manufacture.
The maximum air
pressurethetirecan
hold.
Max Press
Max Load The maximum load the
tire can carry at
maximum air pressure.
Whenever tires are replaced, they
should be replaced with tires of the
same size. Below is an example of
tire size with an explanation of what
each component means.
Manufacturer’s
identification mark.
This indicates that the tire
meets all requirements of
the U.S. Department of
Transportation.
R
DOT
B97R
FW6X
2202
65
245
P
17
105
S
Tire Labeling
Tire Size
Tire Identification Number
Maximum Tire Pressure
Maximum Tire Load
306
P245/65R17 105S
DOT B97R FW6X 2202
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＊
＊
The burning of gasoline in your
vehicle’s engine produces several by-
products. Some of these are carbon
monoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen
(NOx), and hydrocarbons (HC).
Gasoline evaporating from the tank
also produces hydrocarbons. Con-
trolling the production of NOx, CO,
and HC is important to the environ-
ment. Under certain conditions of
sunlight and climate, NOx and HC
react to form photochemical ‘‘smog.’’
Carbon monoxide does not contri-
bute to smog creation, but it is a
poisonous gas.
The United States Clean Air Act
sets standards for automobile
emissions. It also requires that
automobile manufacturers explain to
owners how their emissions controls
workandwhattodotomaintain
them. This section summarizes how
the emissions controls work.
In Canada, Honda vehicles comply
with the Canadian emission
requirements, as specified in an
agreement with Environment
Canada, at the time they are
manufactured.
Your vehicle has a positive
crankcase ventilation system. This
keeps gasses that build up in the
engine’s crankcase from going into
the atmosphere. The positive
crankcase ventilation valve routes
them from the crankcase back to the
intake manifold. They are then
drawn into the engine and burned.
As gasoline evaporates in the fuel
tank, an evaporative emissions
control canister filled with charcoal
adsorbs the vapor. It is stored in this
canister while the engine is off. After
the engine is started and warmed up,
the vapor is drawn into the engine
and burned during driving.
The onboard refueling vapor
recovery (ORVR) system captures
the fuel vapors during refueling. The
vapors are adsorbed in a canister
filled with activated carbon. While
driving, the fuel vapors are drawn
into the engine and burned off.
Emissions Controls
The Clean Air Act
Crankcase Emissions Control
System
Evaporative Emissions Control
System
Onboard Refueling Vapor
Recovery
Technical Information
307
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The exhaust emissions controls
include four systems: PGM-FI,
ignition timing control, exhaust gas
recirculation, and three way catalytic
converter. These four systems work
together to control the engine’s
combustion and minimize the
amount of HC, CO, and NOx that
come out the tailpipe. The exhaust
emissions control systems are
separate from the crankcase and
evaporative emissions control
systems.
The PGM-FI system uses sequential
multiport fuel injection.
It has three subsystems: air intake,
engine control, and fuel control. The
powertrain control module (PCM)
uses various sensors to determine
how much air is going into the
engine. It then controls how much
fuel to inject under all operating
conditions.
This system constantly adjusts the
ignition timing, reducing the amount
of HC, CO, and NOx produced.
The exhaust gas recirculation (EGR)
system takes some of the exhaust
gas and routes it back into the intake
manifold. Adding exhaust gas to the
air/fuel mixture reduces the amount
of NOx produced when the fuel is
burned.
The three way catalytic converter is
in the exhaust system. Through
chemical reactions, it converts HC,
CO, and NOx in the engine’s exhaust
to carbon dioxide (CO ), nitrogen
(N ), and water vapor.
The emissions control systems are
covered by warranties separate from
the rest of your vehicle. Read your
warranty manual for more informa-
tion.
The emissions control systems are
designed and certified to work to-
gether in reducing emissions to
levels that comply with the Clean Air
Act. To make sure the emissions
remain low, you should use only new
Honda replacement parts or their
equivalent for repairs. Using lower
qualitypartsmayincreasethe
emissions from your vehicle.
2
2
Emissions Controls
Exhaust Emissions Controls Replacement Parts
PGM-FI System
Ignition Timing Control System
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR)
System
Three Way Catalytic Converter
308
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The three way catalytic converter
must operate at a high temperature
for the chemical reactions to take
place. It can set on fire any
combustible materials that come
near it. Park your vehicle away from
high grass, dry leaves, or other
flammables.
A defective three way catalytic
converter contributes to air pollution,
and can impair your engine’s per-
formance. Follow these guidelines to
protect your vehicle’s three way
catalytic converter.
Always use unleaded gasoline.
Even a small amount of leaded
gasoline can contaminate the
catalyst metals, making the three
way catalytic converter ineffective.
Keep the engine well maintained.
Have your vehicle diagnosed and
repaired if it is misfiring, back-
firing, stalling, or otherwise not
running properly.
The three way catalytic converter
contains precious metals that serve
as catalysts, promoting chemical
reactions to convert the exhaust
gasses without affecting the metals.
The catalytic converter is referred to
as a three-way catalyst, since it acts
on HC, CO, and NOx. A replacement
unit must be an original Honda part
or its equivalent.
Three Way Catalytic Converter
Technical Information
309
THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER
WARM UP THREE WAY CATALYTIC
CONVERTERS
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you take your vehicle for a state
emissions test shortly after the
battery has been disconnected or
gone dead, it may not pass the test.
This is because of certain ‘‘readiness
codes’’ that must be set in the on-
board diagnostics for the emissions
systems. These codes are erased
when the battery is disconnected,
and set again only after several days
of driving under a variety of
conditions.
If the testing facility determines that
the readiness codes are not set, you
will be requested to return at a later
date to complete the test. If you must
get the vehicle retested within the
next two or three days, you can
condition the vehicle for retesting by
doing the following.
Make sure the gas tank is nearly,
but not completely, full (around
3/4).
Without touching the accelerator
pedal, start the engine, and let it
idle for 20 seconds.
Keep the vehicle in Park. Increase
the engine speed to 2,000 rpm, and
hold it there until the temperature
gauge rises to at least 1/4 of the
scale (about 3 minutes).
Select a nearby lightly traveled
major highway where you can
maintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph
(80to97km/h)foratleast20
minutes. Drive on the highway in
D. Do not use the cruise control.
When traffic allows, drive for 90
seconds without moving the
accelerator pedal. (Vehicle speed
may vary slightly; this is okay.) If
you cannot do this for a
continuous 90 seconds because of
traffic conditions, drive for at least
30 seconds, then repeat it two
more times (for a total of 90
seconds).
Then drive in city/suburban
traffic for at least 10 minutes.
When traffic conditions allow, let
the vehicle coast for several
seconds without using the
accelerator pedal or the brake
pedal.
Stop the vehicle, turn off the
ignition switch, and leave it off for
30 minutes.
If the testing facility determines the
readiness codes are still not set, see
your dealer.
Make sure the vehicle has been
parked with the engine off for 6
hours or more.
Make sure the ambient
temperature is between 40° and
95°F.
State Emissions Testing
Testing of Readiness Codes
310
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Honda dealership personnel are
trained professionals. They should
be able to answer all your questions.
If you encounter a problem that your
dealership does not solve to your
satisfaction, please discuss it with
the dealership’s management. The
service manager or general manager
can help. Almost all problems are
solved in this way.
If you are dissatisfied with the
decision made by the dealership’s
management, contact your Honda
Customer Service Office.
U.S. Owners:
Canadian Owners:
In Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin
Islands:
When you call or write, please give
us this information:
Vehicle identification number (see
page )
Name and address of the dealer
who services your vehicle
Date of purchase
Mileage on your vehicle
Your name, address, and
telephone number
A detailed description of the
problem
Name of the dealer who sold the
vehicle to you
300
Customer Service Information
312
CUSTOMER RELATIONS
RELATIONS AVEC LA CLIENTÉLE
American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
Automobile Customer Service
Mail Stop 500-2N-7A
1919 Torrance Boulevard
Torrance, California 90501-2746
Tel: (800) 999-1009
Honda Canada Inc.
715 Milner Avenue
Toronto, ON
M1B 2K8
Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9
Fax: Toll-free 1-877-939-0909
Toronto (416) 287-4776
Bella International
P.O. Box 190816
San Juan, PR 00919-0816
Tel: (787) 620-7098
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
covers your new vehicle, except for
the battery, emissions control
systems, and accessories, against
defects in materials and
workmanship.
these two
warranties cover your vehicle’s
emissions control systems. Time,
mileage, and coverage are
conditional. Please read your
warranty booklet for exact
information.
provides
coverageforaslongasthepur-
chaser of the muffler owns the
vehicle.
Your new vehicle is covered by these
warranties:
provides prorated
coverage for a replacement battery
purchased from your dealer.
this warranty gives up
to 100 % credit toward a replacement
battery.
a seat
belt that fails to function properly is
covered by a limited warranty.
Please read your warranty booklet
for details.
Restrictions and exclusions apply to
all these warranties. Please read the
2007 Honda warranty information
booklet that came with your vehicle
for precise information on warranty
coverages. Your vehicle’s original
tires are covered by their
manufacturer. Tire warranty
information is in a separate booklet.
Please refer to the 2007 warranty
manual that came with your vehicle.
covers all Honda
replacement parts against defects in
materials and workmanship.
Honda accessories are covered
under this warranty. Time and
mileage limits depend on the type of
accessory and other factors. Please
read your warranty booklet for
details.
all exterior body panels are
covered for rust-through from the
inside for the specified time period
with no mileage limit.
Warranty Coverages
U.S. Owners
Canadian Owners
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
Emissions Control Systems Defects
Warranty and Emissions
Performance Warranty
Replacement Muffler Lifetime
Limited Warranty
Replacement Battery Limited
Warranty
Original Equipment Battery Limited
Warranty
Seat Belt Limited Warranty
Replacement Parts Limited
Warranty
Accessory Limited Warranty
Rust Perforation Limited Warranty
Warranty and Customer Relations
313
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If NHTSA receives similar com-
plaints, it may open an investigation,
and if it finds that a safety defect
exists in a group of vehicles, it may
order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become
involved in individual problems
between you, your dealer, or
American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA), in addition
to notifying American Honda Motor
Co., Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY:1-800-424-9153);
go to http://
www.safercar.gov; or
write to: Administrator, NHTSA,
4
00 Seventh Street, SW., Washington,
DC 20590. You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle
safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Vehicles)
314
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
＊
＊
＊
＊
２
０
０
７
Ｈ
Ｏ
Ｎ
The publications shown below can be purchased from Helm
Incorporated. You can order in any of three ways:
Detach and mail the order form on the right half of this page
Call Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356
Go online at
If you are interested in other years or models, contact Helm Inc.
at 1-800-782-4356.
(credit card orders only)
Valid only for sales within the United States. Canadian
owners should contact their authorized Honda dealer.
Authorized Manuals
Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)
Authorized Manuals
315
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-782-4356
OR
(NOTE: For Credit Card Holder Orders Only)
MINIMUM CREDIT CARD PURCHASE $10.00
Price
Each
$70.00
$50.00
$44.00
$34.00
$29.00
$12.00
$12.00
FREE
Form Description
2006-07 Honda Ridgeline
Service Manual Base Book
2006-07 Honda Ridgeline
Electrical Troubleshooting Manual
2006-07 Honda Ridgeline
Body Repair Manual
2007 Honda Ridgeline
Owner’s Manual
2007 Honda Ridgeline
Quick Start Guide
2007 Ridgeline Honda Service History
Order Form for Previous Years-
Indicate Year and Model Desired
Publication
Form Number
61SJC01
61SJC01EL
61SJC30
31SJC611
31SJC800
31SJCQ10
31SJCM10
HON-R
2007 Honda Ridgeline Navigation Manual
PUBLICATION NUMBER
VEHICLE MODEL
Name Year
Qty
Price
Each
Total
Price
GRAND TOTAL
HANDLING CHARGE
Mich. Purchases
Add 6% Sales Tax
TOTAL MATERIAL
$6.95
Monday-Friday 8:00 A.M. 6:00 P.M. EST
By completing this form you can order the materials desired. You can
pay by check or money order, or charge to your credit card. Mail to
Helm Incorporated at the address shown on the back of the order form.
Prices are subject to change without
notice and without incurring obligation.
Orders are mailed within 10 days. Please
allow adequate time for delivery.
Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring obligation.
www. helminc. com
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
Ｓ
Ｈ
Ｉ
Ｐ
Ｔ
Ｏ
Ｐ
Ａ
Ｙ
Ｍ
Ｅ
Ｎ
Ｔ
This manual covers maintenance and recommended
procedures for repair to engine and chassis components.
It is written for the journeyman mechanic, but is simple
enough for most mechanically-inclined owners to under-
stand.
This manual complements the service manual by
providing in-depth troubleshooting information for each
electrical circuit in your vehicle.
This manual describes the procedures involved in the
replacement of damaged body parts.
Authorized Manuals
Service Manual:
Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:
Body Repair Manual:
316
NOTE: Dealers and Companies please provide dealer or company name,
and also the name of the person to whose attention the shipment should
be sent. For purchases outside U.S.A. please write to the address shown
below for a quotation.
P.O. BOX 07280·DETROIT, MICHIGAN 48207·1-800-782-4356
Customer Name
Attention
Apartment Number
State & Zip Code
City
Daytime Telephone Number
Check or money order enclosed payable to Helm Inc U.S. funds only.
Do not send cash
Master
Card
VISA Check here if your billing address is different
from the shipping address shown above.
Account Number
Expiration: Mo. Yr.
CUSTOMER SIGNATURE
DATE
Street Address No P.O. Box Number
()
These Publications cannot be returned for credit without receiving advance authorization within 14
days of delivery. On returns, a restocking fee may be applied against the original order.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
...Accessories and Modifications . 184
ACCESSORY (Ignition Key
.......................................Position) . 82
............Accessory Power Sockets . 116
....................Additives, Engine Oil . 247
........Adjusting the Steering wheel . 79
...........................Advanced Airbags . 25
.....................................Airbag (SRS) . 9
..............Air Conditioning System . 122
.........................................Usage . 123
...............Air Outlets (Vents) . 124, 129
.......................Air Pressure, Tires . 266
......................................Antifreeze . 249
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
...............................Indicator . 63, 208
...................................Operation . 208
..............Anti-theft, Audio System . 162
.Anti-theft Steering Column Lock . 82
........................................Armrests . 101
................Audio System . 133, 142, 159
.....Auto Door Locking/Unlocking . 84
Automatic Heated Wiper
......................................Zone . 76, 127
...Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners . 19
.............Automatic Speed Control . 165
..............Automatic Transmission . 197
..........................Capacity, Fluid . 302
...............Checking Fluid Level . 251
.......................................Shifting . 197
Shift Lever Position
...............................Indicators . 197
................Shift Lever Positions . 198
....................Shift Lock Release . 202
......................Auxiliary Input Jack . 161
Back Window
.......................................Indicator . 69
...................................Operation . 105
Battery
Charging System
...........................Indicator . 62, 288
............................Jump Starting . 284
..............................Maintenance . 270
............................Specifications . 303
Bed Lights
.......................................Indicator . 69
...................................Operation . 120
..............................Before Driving . 177
....................................Belts,Seat .8,19
.........................Beverage Holders . 114
..................................Booster Seats . 50
Brakes
...........Anti-lock System (ABS) . 208
.............Break-in, New Linings . 178
...........................................Fluid . 253
............Bulb Replacement . 257, 258
.......................................Parking . 109
.................System Indicator . 63, 290
........................Wear Indicators . 207
.............................Braking System . 207
.................Break-in, New Vehicle . 178
..Brightness Control, Instruments . 78
........................Brights, Headlights . 76
Index
A
B
INDEX
I
Main Menu
...............DANGER, Explanation of . iii
...................................Dashboard . 3, 58
Bulb Replacement
..........................Back-up Lights . 257
..............................Brake Lights . 257
.................................Bed Lights . 260
Front Turn Signal /Parking/
.......................Hazard Lights . 256
.................................Headlights . 255
.........High-mount Brake Light . 258
.................License Plate Lights . 259
Rear Bulbs (Brake/Taillights,
Turn Signal/Hazard Lights,
................Back-up Lights) . 257
............................Specifications . 303
..............................Bulbs, Halogen . 255
............................Capacities Chart . 302
.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 53
...........................Cargo Hooks . 97, 114
.............................Carrying Cargo . 186
.............CAUTION, Explanation of . iii
.........................................CD Care . 161
..........................CD Changer . 152, 153
CD Player/Changer Error
...................................Messages . 162
.......................................CD Player . 151
........................Certification Label . 300
....................................Chains, tire . 269
Change Oil
........................................How to . 247
......................................When to . 235
....................Changing a Flat Tire . 275
...Charging System Indicator . 62, 288
............Checklist, Before Driving . 195
..................Childproof Door Locks . 84
.....................................Child Safety . 32
..............................Booster Seats . 50
...................................Child Seats . 39
.....Important Safety Reminders . 32
..........................................Infants . 37
..........................Larger Children . 49
.........................................LATCH . 41
......................Risks with Airbags . 33
.............................Small Children . 38
....................................Tether . 41, 46
.........Where Should a Child Sit? . 33
.......................................Child Seats . 39
.........................................LATCH . 41
..........Tether Anchorage Points . 46
...............Climate Control System . 122
..............................................Clock . 163
....................................Coat Hooks . 115
.....................Code, Audio System . 162
........................CO in the Exhaust . 307
......................Compact Spare Tire . 274
.........................................Compass . 168
.................Console Compartment . 113
.................Consumer Information . 312
.............Controls, Instruments and . 57
Coolant
........................................Adding . 249
....................................Checking . 182
.........................Proper Solution . 249
...................Temperature Gauge . 72
..............................Courtesy Light . 118
Crankcase Emissions Control
........................................System . 307
Cruise Control
.......................................Indicator . 65
...................................Operation . 165
...................................Cup Holders . 114
.............Customer Service Office . 312
Index
C
D
II
Main Menu
＊
＊
CONTINUED
...................................Fan, Interior . 123
.........................................Features . 121
....................Filling the Fuel Tank . 179
Filters
.........................Dust and Pollen . 262
...............................................Oil . 248
.............Flashers, Hazard Warning . 79
...................Flat Tire, Changing a . 275
..............................Economy, Fuel . 183
..................................Emergencies . 273
.............Battery, Jump Starting . 284
...........Brake System Indicator . 290
................Changing a Flat Tire . 275
.....Charging System Indicator . 288
..................Checking the Fuses . 291
.........Hazard Warning Flashers . 79
.....Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 288
...Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 289
..................Overheated Engine . 286
............................Stuck Vehicle . 297
.......................................Towing . 296
.........................Emergency Brake . 109
.......................Emissions Controls . 307
Engine
....Coolant Temperature Gauge . 72
Malfunction Indicator
................................Lamp . 62, 289
.........................Oil Life Display . 235
........Oil Pressure Indicator . 62, 288
..............Oil, What Kind to Use . 246
...............................Overheating . 286
............................Specifications . 303
............................Speed Limiter . 201
.......................................Starting . 196
.................Engine, if it won’t start . 283
Evaporative Emissions Control
........................................System . 307
...............................Exhaust Fumes . 53
Exhaust Gas Recirculation
........................................System . 308
Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat
........................................Belts by . 16
................Daytime Running Lights . 78
.................................Dead Battery . 284
.........Defects, Reporting Safety . 314
..............Defrosting the Windows . 127
................Differential Fluid, Rear . 252
....................................Dimensions . 302
...............Dimming the Headlights . 76
Dipstick
..........Automatic Transmission . 251
..................................Engine Oil . 182
..........................Directional Signals . 76
........Disc Brake Wear Indicators . 207
.....................Disposal of Used Oil . 248
.Door and Tailgate Open Monitor . 64
Doors
..Locking and Unlocking . 83, 84, 86
....................Lockout Prevention . 83
......................Power Door Locks . 83
........DOT Tire Quality Grading . 304
...........Driver and Passenger Safety . 5
...........................................Driving . 193
....................................Economy . 183
...................................................D3 . 199
Dual-Action Tailgate
.................................Indicator . 64, 94
.....................................Operation . 92
..........Dual Temperature Control . 130
..................Dust and Pollen Filter . 262
Index
E
F
INDEX
III
Main Menu
＊＊
...Identification Number, Vehicle . 300
...............Gas Mileage, Improving . 183
Gasoline
...............Fuel Reserve Indicator . 65
...........................................Gauge . 71
................Octane Requirement . 178
........................Tank, Filling the . 179
................Gas Station Procedures . 179
Gauges
...Engine Coolant Temperature . 72
...............................................Fuel . 71
...............................Speedometer . 70
.................................Tachometer . 70
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight
.......................................Rating) . 213
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight
.......................................Rating) . 213
............Gearshift Lever Positions . 198
......................................Glove Box . 115
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
.......................................Rating) . 213
.....................................Floor Mats . 261
Fluids
..........Automatic Transmission . 251
..........................................Brake . 253
..........................Power Steering . 254
.......................Rear Differential . 252
...................Transfer Assembly . 253
..................Windshield Washer . 250
FM Stereo Radio
...................................Reception . 140
.................Folding the Rear Seats . 103
..........................Four-way Flashers . 79
........................................Front Seat . 98
..............................Adjusting . 98, 100
.........................................Airbags . 23
.......................................Heaters . 104
.................................................Fuel . 178
......................Fill Door and Cap . 179
...........................................Gauge . 71
................Octane Requirement . 178
...............................Oxygenated . 178
........................Reserve Indicator . 65
........................Tank, Filling the . 179
.....................Fuses, Checking the . 291
.............Halogen Headlight Bulbs . 255
..............Hazard Warning Flashers . 79
.................................Headlights . 75, 76
........................................Aiming . 255
..............Automatic Lighting Off . 77
.................................Control Dial . 76
.......Daytime Running Lights . 78
..................High Beam Indicator . 65
.....High Beams, Turning on . 75, 76
............Low Beams, Turning on . 76
.........................Reminder Chime . 77
........Replacing Halogen Bulbs . 255
..................................Turning On . 76
............................Head Restraints . 102
.............................Heated Mirrors . 111
...............................Heaters, Seats . 104
.....................Heating and Cooling . 123
.................High-Low Beam Switch . 75
HomeLink Universal
................................Transceiver . 171
.......................Hood, Opening the . 181
..................................................Horn . 74
Index
G
H
I
IV
Main Menu
＊＊
CONTINUED
..................................................Keys . 80
.......................Label, Certification . 300
.................Lane Change, Signaling . 76
..................Lap/Shoulder Belts . 14, 19
...........................Light Control Dial . 76
Ignition
..............................................Keys . 80
...........................................Switch . 82
............Timing Control System . 308
........................Immobilizer System . 81
.........Important Safety Precautions . 6
...................................In-Bed Trunk . 95
....................Emergency Opener . 96
............................Open Indicator . 69
.........Indicators, Instrument Panel . 59
...............ABS (Anti-lock Brake) . 63
.......................A/T Temperature . 66
....................Back Window Open . 69
.............................Bed Lights On . 69
Brake (Parking and Brake
....................................System) . 63
........................Charging System . 62
.............................Cruise Control . 65
...................................Door Open . 64
DRL (Daytime Running
..................................Lights) . 65
...................................High Beam . 65
....................In-Bed Trunk Open . 69
........Key (Immobilizer System) . 63
.....................................Lights On . 66
......................................Low Fuel . 65
........................Low Oil Pressure . 62
......................Low Tire Pressure . 68
..................Maintenance Minder . 67
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
.......................................(MIL) . 62
...........................Side Airbag Off . 62
.......................................Seat Belt . 61
...............................................SRS . 62
..............................Tailgate Open . 64
...............Tire Pressure Monitor . 68
.............................TPMS System . 68
Turn Signal and Hazard
...................................Warning . 64
............................VSA Activation . 67
.................................VSA System . 67
..........................................VTM-4 . 66
..............................Washer Level . 65
..................Individual Map Lights . 119
...............................Infant Restraint . 37
......................................Infant Seats . 37
...................Inflation, Proper Tire . 266
........................Information Display . 70
.........Engine Oil Life Indicator . 235
...........Maintenance Items . 238, 242
.................................Inside Mirror . 110
.............................Inspection, Tire . 266
........................Instrument Panel . 3, 58
........Instrument Panel Brightness . 78
...............................Interior Lights . 118
........................................Introduction . i
................Jacking Up the Vehicle . 277
.......................................Jack, Tire . 275
................................Jump Starting . 284
Index
J
L
K
INDEX
V
Main Menu
..................................Maintenance . 233
Owner’s Maintenance
...................................Checks . 241
.................................Record . 243-244
................................Minder . 235-242
.........................Minder Indicator . 67
..........................................Safety . 234
.Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 62, 289
..............Manual Seat Adjustments . 98
...............................Meters, Gauges . 70
........................Mirrors, Adjusting . 111
...............Modifying Your Vehicle . 185
.......................................Moonroof . 108
...Octane Requirement, Gasoline . 178
.........................................Odometer . 70
....................Off-Highway Driving . 227
...................Off-Road Precautions . 228
Oil
........................Change, How to . 247
......................Change, When to . 235
......................Checking Engine . 182
...........................................Filter . 247
..............Pressure Indicator . 62, 288
Selecting Proper Viscosity
......................................Chart . 246
...........ON (Ignition Key Position) . 82
............................Outside Mirrors . 111
....................Overheating, Engine . 286
....Owner’s Maintenance Checks . 241
.........................Oxygenated Fuels . 178
..............Panel Brightness Control . 78
........................Park Gear Position . 198
...........................................Parking . 206
...............................Parking Brake . 109
.................................Parking Lights . 76
..Parking Over Things that Burn . 309
.............................PGM-FI System . 308
Pickup Bed
.........................Carrying Cargo . 189
.........................................Lights . 120
..............Power Seat Adjustments . 100
...............Power Socket Locations . 116
Lights
....................Bulb Replacement . 255
.......................................Indicator . 66
.......................................Interior . 118
.........................................Parking . 76
..................................Turn Signal . 76
............................Load Limits . 187, 212
......LOCK (Ignition Key Position) . 82
Locks
.......Anti-theft Steering Column . 82
............................Fuel Fill Door . 179
..................................Glove Box . 115
...............................In-Bed Trunk . 95
....................Lockout Prevention . 83
.................................Power Door . 83
........................Low Coolant Level . 182
.........................Low Fuel Indicator . 65
...Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 62, 288
...Lubricant Specifications Chart . 302
...........Luggage, Storing (Cargo) . 186
...................Neutral Gear Position . 199
..................New Vehicle Break-in . 178
...................NOTICE, Explanation of . i
...............Numbers, Identification . 300
Index
N
O
P
M
VI
Main Menu
＊
＊
＊
CONTINUED
.........Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts . 16
.........Protecting Adults and Teens . 11
...Additional Safety Precautions . 17
.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 16
........................Protecting Children . 32
.....................General Guidelines . 32
.......................Protecting Infants . 37
.......Protecting Larger Children . 49
.........Protecting Small Children . 38
Using Child Seats with
.....................................Tethers . 46
.............................Using LATCH . 41
...................Radiator Overheating . 286
Radio/CD Sound
.......................System . 133, 142, 148
.................Rear Differential Fluid . 252
..Rear Lights, Bulb Replacement . 257
..........................Rear View Mirror . 110
Rear View Mirror with
.....................................Compass . 168
....................Rear (Back) Window . 106
.......Reclining the Seat-Backs . 98, 100
................Remote Audio Controls . 161
.......................Remote Transmitter . 89
Replacement Information
................Engine Oil and Filter . 247
..........................................Fuses . 291
................................Light Bulbs . 255
........................................Minder . 242
................................Timing Belt . 254
...........................................Tires . 275
.............................Wiper Blades . 262
Replacing Seat Belts After a
............................................Crash . 20
...Reserve Tank, Engine Coolant . 182
..................Reverse Gear Position . 198
................................Rotation, Tire . 267
..................................Safety Belts . 8, 19
.........Safety Defects, Reporting . 314
.................................Safety Features . 7
...........................................Airbags . 9
..................................Door Locks . 11
..........................Head Restraints . 13
.................................Seat Belts . 8, 18
...........Seats and Seat-Backs . 11, 12
.............Safety Labels, Location of . 54
..............................Safety Messages . iii
.....................Satellite Radio, XM . 142
.....................................Seat Belts . 8, 18
...............Additional Information . 18
Automatic Seat Belt
...............................Tensioners . 19
.....................................Cleaning . 261
......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 19
................................Maintenance . 20
Reminder Light and
................................Beeper . 18, 61
...................System Components . 18
...............Use During Pregnancy . 16
...Wearing a Lap/Shoulder Belt . 14
.................................................Seats . 98
..............Adjusting the Seat . 98, 100
.............Folding the Rear Seats . 103
........................Head Restraints . 102
........................................Heater . 104
............................Security System . 164
...............................Serial Number . 300
...........................Service Intervals . 242
......Service Manual, Purchasing . 315
.........Service Station Procedures . 179
Index
INDEX
S
R
VII
Main Menu
＊
.....................................Tachometer . 70
Tailgate, Dual-Action
.................................Indicator . 64, 94
.....................................Operation . 92
......Taillights, Changing Bulbs in . 257
.Taking Care of the Unexpected . 273
Technical Descriptions
....DOT Tire Quality Grading . 304
.....Emissions Control Systems . 307
Three Way Catalytic
...............................Converter . 309
.......................Temperature Gauge . 72
...................Tensioners, Seat Belts . 19
............................Theft Protection . 162
..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 309
....................................Timing Belt . 254
....................................Tire Chains . 269
.........Tire, How to Change a Flat . 275
.................................Tire Labeling . 306
Tire Pressure Monitoring
....................System (TPMS) . 204
Low Tire Pressure
...........................Indicator . 68, 204
Shifting the Automatic
.............................Transmission . 197
...Shift Lever Position Indicators . 197
........................Shift Lock Release . 202
....................................Side Airbags . 26
......................Side Curtain Airbags . 28
Side Marker (Parking)
...Lights, Bulb Replacement in . 256
...............................Signaling Turns . 76
.....................................Snow Tires . 269
................Sound System . 133, 142, 148
Spare Tire
..............................Inflating . 265, 274
....................Specifications . 269, 303
....................Specifications Charts . 302
................................Speed Control . 165
...................................Speedometer . 70
..........SRS, Additional Information . 21
...Additional Safety Precautions . 31
......Airbag System Components . 21
.............................Airbag Service . 30
How the Passenger Airbag Off
......................Indicator Works . 29
How the Side Airbag Off
......................Indicator Works . 29
..How the SRS Indicator Works . 28
How Your Front Airbags
.........................................Work . 23
...How Your Side Airbags Work . 26
How Your Side Curtain Airbags
.........................................Work . 28
.............................SRS Indicator . 28, 62
....START (Ignition Key Position) . 82
.......................Starting the Engine . 196
................With a Dead Battery . 284
..............State Emissions Testing . 310
........Steam Coming from Engine . 286
Steering Wheel
..................................Adjustment . 79
.............Anti-theft Column Lock . 82
...Stereo Sound System . 133, 142, 148
....................Storing Your Vehicle . 272
................................Stuck Vehicle . 297
........................................Sun Visor . 117
........................Sunglasses Holder . 115
Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS)
......................................Servicing . 30
.........................SRS Indicator . 28, 62
...................System Components . 21
..................................Synthetic Oil . 247
Index
T
VIII
Main Menu
＊＊
＊
CONTINUED
Unexpected, Taking Care
..........................................of the . 273
..Uniform Tire Quality Grading . 304
........................Unleaded Gasoline . 178
.......Used Oil, How to Dispose of . 248
................................Vanity Mirror . 117
.........Vehicle Capacity Load . 187, 302
......................Vehicle Dimensions . 302
....Vehicle Identification Number . 300
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA)
....................................System . 210
........VSA System Indicator . 67, 210
...VSA Activation Indicator . 67, 210
.........................VSA Off Switch . 211
.............................Vehicle Storage . 272
.....................................Ventilation . 125
.................................................VIN . 300
..................................Viscosity, Oil . 246
..................................VTM-4 Lock . 203
............WARNING, Explanation of . iii
.........Warning Labels, Location of . 54
..................Warranty Coverages . 313
Washer, Windshield
........Checking the Fluid Level . 250
............................Level Indicator . 65
.....................................Operation . 75
...........................................Wheels . 264
...............Adjusting the Steering . 79
......................................Wrench . 276
Required Federal
............................Explanation . 175
.......Tire Pressure Monitor . 68, 205
..................TPMS Indicator . 68, 205
...............................................Tires . 265
..............................Air Pressure . 266
.........................Checking Wear . 266
..........................Compact Spare . 274
....DOT Tire Quality Grading . 304
......................................Inflation . 265
..................................Inspection . 266
..............................Maintenance . 267
...................................Replacing . 268
......................................Rotating . 267
...........................................Snow . 269
....................Specifications . 269, 303
................................Tire Chains . 269
...................Tools, Tire Changing . 275
Towing
.....................................A Trailer . 212
................Emergency Wrecker . 296
.................................Equipment . 220
....Equipment and Accessories . 216
.............................Weight Limit . 212
.........................Trailer Loading . 214
.................Trailer Towing Tips . 220
.............Transfer Assembly Fluid . 253
Transmission
...............Checking Fluid Level . 251
...........................Fluid Selection . 252
..............Identification Number . 301
.............Shifting the Automatic . 197
.....................................Treadwear . 304
.......................................Trip Meter . 71
..................................Trunk, In-Bed . 95
....................................Turn Signals . 76
Index
W
V
U
INDEX
IX
Main Menu
＊
＊
......................XM Satellite Radio . 142
Windows
................Operating the Power . 105
Windshield
...................................Defroster . 125
.......................................Washers . 75
...........Wiper Zone, Heated . 76, 127
Wipers, Windshield
.......................Changing Blades . 262
.....................................Operation . 75
....................................Worn Tires . 266
.....Wrecker, Emergency Towing . 296
:U.S.only
Index
X
X
Main Menu
Service Information Summary
Gasoline: Tire Pressure (measured cold):
Fuel Tank Capacity:
Recommended Engine Oil:
Automatic Transmission Fluid:
Power Steering Fluid:
Brake Fluid:
Rear Differential Fluid:
Transfer Assembly Fluid:
32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm
)
Front/Rear:
Compact Spare Tire:
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm
)
22.01 US gal (83.3
)
API Premium grade 5W-20
detergent oil (see page ).
Oil change capacity (including
filter):
4.5 US qt (4.3
)
Honda ATF-Z1 (Automatic
Transmission Fluid) preferred, or
aDEXRON
III ATF as a
temporary replacement (see page
).
Honda Power Steering Fluid
preferred, or another brand of
power steering fluid as a
temporary replacement. Do not
use ATF (see page ).
Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid
DOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 or
DOT 4 brake fluid as a temporary
replacement (see page ).
Honda VTM-4 Differential Fluid
(see page ).
SAE 90 or SAE 80W-90 viscosity
hypoid gear oil, API service
classified GL4 or GL5 only (see
page ).
Unleaded gasoline, pump octane
number of 87 or higher.
251
254
252
253
246
253
Main Menu
